Sony 6220502-BV Transmitter module for mobile applications User Manual Integrators
Sony Mobile Communications Inc Transmitter module for mobile applications Integrators
Sony >
Contents
- 1. Exhibit 08 Manual Statements
- 2. Integrators User Manual
Integrators User Manual
Product Photo/Illustration
GM28
Integrator’s Manual
SAR statement: This product is intended to be used with the antenna or other
radiating element at least 20cm away from any part of the human body.
The information contained in this document is the proprietary information of
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International. The contents are
confidential and any disclosure to persons other than the officers, employees, agents
or subcontractors of the owner or licensee of this document, without the prior written
consent of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, is strictly
prohibited. Further, no portion of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior written consent
of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, the copyright holder.
First edition (November 2002)
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International publishes this manual
without making any warranty as to the content contained herein. Further
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International reserves the right to make
modifications, additions and deletions to this manual due to typographical errors,
inaccurate information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment at any time
and without notice. Such changes will, nevertheless be incorporated into new editions
of this manual.
All rights reserved.
©Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications International, 2002
Publication number: LZT 123 7468 P1A
Printed in UK
3
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Contents
Part 1: Overview................................................................................................. 11
1. Introduction............................................................................................................ 13
1.1 Target Users ......................................................................................... 13
1.2 Prerequisites ......................................................................................... 13
1.3 Manual Structure ......................................................................................... 13
2. GM28 Modem......................................................................................................... 14
2.1 Description ......................................................................................... 14
2.2 Highlights ......................................................................................... 14
2.3 GM28 in a Communication System............................................................. 15
2.4 Main Features and Services ......................................................................... 17
2.4.1 Types of Mobile Station .................................................................. 17
2.4.2 Short Message Service .................................................................... 17
2.4.3 Voice Calls...................................................................................... 18
2.4.4 Data................................................................................................. 18
2.4.5 Fax .................................................................................................. 18
2.4.6 Supplementary Services .................................................................. 18
2.4.7 Serial Communication .................................................................... 19
2.4.8 Interfacing with the GM28.............................................................. 19
2.5 Service and Support ..................................................................................... 20
2.6 Precautions ......................................................................................... 20
3. Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 21
Part 2: Integrating the Modem............................................................................ 23
1. Mechanical Description ......................................................................................... 25
1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... 25
1.2 Physical Dimensions .................................................................................... 27
2. Electrical Description ............................................................................................ 28
2.1 Power Connector ......................................................................................... 28
2.2 Audio Connector ......................................................................................... 29
2.3 Antenna Connector....................................................................................... 31
2.4 SIM Card Reader ......................................................................................... 32
2.5 RS232 Serial Port......................................................................................... 33
2.5.1 Serial Data...................................................................................... 34
2.5.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD ......................................................... 34
2.5.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, RI ......................... 34
2.6 Real Time Clock ......................................................................................... 35
2.7 Software Updates ......................................................................................... 35
3. Operation ................................................................................................................ 36
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
4
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.1 Switching On the Modem............................................................................. 36
3.2 Switching Off the Modem ............................................................................ 36
3.3 Resetting the Modem.................................................................................... 36
3.4 Operating States/LED................................................................................... 37
4. Hints for Integrating the Modem..........................................................................38
4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions..................................................................... 38
4.1.1 General............................................................................................38
4.1.2 SIM Card .........................................................................................38
4.1.3 Antenna............................................................................................39
4.2 Installation of the Modem............................................................................. 39
4.2.1 Where to Install the Modem ............................................................39
4.2.2 How to Install the Modem ...............................................................41
4.3 Antenna .......................................................................................... 41
4.3.1 General............................................................................................41
4.3.2 Antenna Type...................................................................................42
4.3.3 Antenna Placement..........................................................................42
4.3.4 The Antenna Cable ..........................................................................42
4.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances...........................................43
4.4 Attachments .......................................................................................... 43
5. Technical Data ........................................................................................................44
Part 3: Using AT Commands.............................................................................. 49
1. Introduction to AT Commands.............................................................................51
1.1 Overview .......................................................................................... 51
1.2 Syntax Description ....................................................................................... 51
1.2.1 Conventions .....................................................................................51
1.2.2 AT Command Syntax .......................................................................52
1.2.3 AT Response Syntax.........................................................................53
1.3 Error Codes .......................................................................................... 55
1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code) ...........................55
1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code).................56
1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands............................................. 57
2. Call Control.............................................................................................................59
2.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control ...................................................................... 59
2.2 ATA Answer Incoming Call ..................................................... 59
2.3 ATD Dial................................................................................... 60
2.4 ATH Hang up ............................................................................ 62
2.5 ATO Return to Online Data Mode ............................................ 62
2.6 ATP Select Pulse Dialling ........................................................ 62
2.7 ATT Select Tone Dialling......................................................... 62
2.8 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control.................................... 63
2.9 AT+CHUP Hang up Call .................................................................... 63
2.10 AT+CMOD Call Mode......................................................................... 64
2.11 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up ................................................................ 65
5
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.12 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation ........................................... 65
3. Control and Status ................................................................................................. 67
3.1 ATQ Result Code Suppression ................................................. 67
3.2 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control.............................................. 67
3.3 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character ............................................. 68
3.4 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character ........................... 68
3.5 ATS4 Response Formatting Character....................................... 69
3.6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)........ 70
3.7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control................................................. 70
3.8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout .................................... 71
3.9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control.............................. 71
3.10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control.............................. 72
3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring................................................. 72
3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time ....................................... 73
3.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset...................................................... 74
3.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event........................................................... 74
3.15 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date .......................................................... 75
3.16 AT+CEER Extended Error Report..................................................... 75
3.17 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality................................................... 76
3.18 AT+CIND Indicator Control.............................................................. 77
3.19 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands ..................................... 78
3.20 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error.................................................. 78
3.21 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting................................ 79
3.22 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status ...................................................... 80
3.23 AT+CPIN PIN Control...................................................................... 81
3.24 AT+CPWD Change Password............................................................. 83
3.25 AT+CR Service Reporting Control ............................................... 85
3.26 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code........................................................ 85
3.27 AT+CSAS Save Settings.................................................................... 86
3.28 AT+CSQ Signal Strength................................................................. 87
3.29 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update ......................................... 88
4. Audio ....................................................................................................................... 89
4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification..................... 89
4.2 AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation................................... 95
4.3 AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request .......................................... 97
4.4 AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection ...................................... 98
4.5 AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal............................................. 99
4.6 AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode .......................................... 100
4.7 AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode........................................... 100
4.8 AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request ...................... 101
4.9 AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control........................ 101
5. Data - CSD/HSCSD.............................................................................................. 103
5.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type............................................ 103
5.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol....................................................... 105
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
6
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6. Data - GPRS..........................................................................................................107
6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate.............................. 107
6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach ................................................. 108
6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State.............................................................. 109
6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context....................................................... 110
6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting .................................................. 112
6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address ........................................................ 113
6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)........ 114
6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) .......................... 116
6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status ............................... 119
6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages .......................... 120
7. Data - HSCSD .......................................................................................................121
7.1 AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters ................................... 121
7.2 AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters............................................ 122
7.3 AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration................ 123
7.4 AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report ............................................ 124
7.5 AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading ................ 125
8. Fax..........................................................................................................................127
8.1 AT*E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification .... 127
8.2 Low Level Fax Commands......................................................................... 128
9. Identification .........................................................................................................129
9.1 AT Attention Command ....................................................... 129
9.2 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration ............................ 129
9.3 AT&W Store User Profile........................................................... 129
9.4 AT* List all Supported AT Commands.................................. 130
9.5 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification ........................... 130
9.6 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification....................................... 130
9.7 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification ................................... 131
9.8 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification ............ 131
9.9 ATI Identification Information .............................................. 131
9.10 AT+GCAP Request Modem Capabilities List .................................. 132
10. Interface ................................................................................................................133
10.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control .................................................................... 133
10.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control ............................................ 133
10.3 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response.......................................... 133
10.4 AT&S Circuit 107 (DSR) Response.......................................... 134
10.5 AT+WS46 Mode Selection............................................................... 134
10.6 ATE Command Echo.............................................................. 135
10.7 ATV DCE Response Format................................................... 135
10.8 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration ...................................... 136
10.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol ............................... 137
10.10 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings..................................................... 139
10.11 AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format .................................. 139
7
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10.12 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control...................................... 140
10.13 AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting ........................... 141
10.14 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command ..................................... 141
10.15 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time ............................. 142
11. Network................................................................................................................. 143
11.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description .................................... 143
11.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode ............. 145
11.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication ................................. 151
11.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status ........................................ 151
11.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile ................................ 152
11.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network ......................... 153
11.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network ........................ 154
11.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number............................... 154
11.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name................................................. 155
11.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification................................................ 156
11.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock.................................................................. 156
11.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number ........................................................ 158
11.13 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation................... 159
11.14 AT+COPS Operator Selection ......................................................... 161
11.15 AT+CREG Network Registration..................................................... 162
11.16 AT*ECPI Ciphering Indicator........................................................ 163
11.17 AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS ..................................... 165
12. Phonebook ............................................................................................................ 167
12.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum......................... 167
12.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group .................................................. 167
12.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group................................................... 168
12.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number.................................. 169
12.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group................................................... 171
12.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item........................................... 171
12.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read ..................................................... 172
12.8 AT*EGIR Ericsson Group Item Read............................................. 172
12.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number.............................................. 173
12.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find ............................................................. 174
12.11 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read ............................................................ 174
12.12 AT+CPBS Phone Storage ................................................................ 176
12.13 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write ........................................................... 177
13. Short Message Services - Point to Point............................................................. 179
13.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control.................................................................... 179
13.2 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages .......................... 179
13.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage ............................................ 179
13.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address.................................................. 181
13.5 AT+CMGF Message Format............................................................. 182
13.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory ............................................ 182
13.7 AT+CMGS Send Message ................................................................ 185
13.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage ........................................................ 188
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
8
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.9 AT+CMGC Send Command .............................................................. 189
13.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE .................................... 192
13.11 AT+CMGR Read Message................................................................. 196
13.12 AT+CMGL List Message................................................................... 201
13.13 AT+CMGD Delete Message .............................................................. 207
13.14 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters ......................................... 207
13.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters ............................................. 208
13.16 AT+CSCS Select Character Set ....................................................... 209
13.17 AT+CSMS Select Message Service .................................................. 210
14. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast............................................................213
14.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE .................................... 213
14.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type ............................. 213
15. SIM Application Toolkit ......................................................................................215
15.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control .................................................................... 215
15.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings .................................. 215
15.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text ................................................ 216
15.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey ..................................................... 217
15.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input ...................................................... 219
15.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item ................................................... 222
15.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu................................................ 224
15.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection) ......................... 226
15.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call .................................................. 226
15.10 *E2STKE STK Send Short Message............................................... 228
15.11 *E2STKP STK Send SS.................................................................. 229
15.12 *E2STKU STK Send USSD ............................................................ 230
15.13 *E2STKR STK Refresh................................................................... 231
15.14 AT*E2STKTO SIM Application Toolkit Settings .................................. 231
16. Supplementary Services.......................................................................................233
16.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control .................................................................... 233
16.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter ................................................ 233
16.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum............................... 234
16.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge ........................................................... 235
16.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table ................................ 236
16.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function................................................ 237
16.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set ................................................ 238
16.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set............................................................ 239
16.9 AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch ......................... 239
16.10 AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications...................... 240
16.11 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions....................... 245
16.12 AT+CCWA Call Waiting ................................................................... 247
16.13 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty ............................................... 249
16.14 AT+CLIP Call Line Identification Presentation ............................. 250
16.15 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction........................... 251
16.16 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification .............................. 253
16.17 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data .................... 255
9
LZT 123 7468 P1A
17. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands ............................................................. 259
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
10
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Product Photo/Illustration
Part 1: Overview
13
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1. Introduction
1.1 Target Users
GM28 modems are designed to be integrated into machine-machine or
man-to-machine communications applications. They are intended to be
used by manufacturers, system integrators, applications developers and
developers of wireless communications equipment.
1.2 Prerequisites
It is assumed that the person integrating the GM28 into an application
has a basic understanding of the following:
• GSM networking;
• Wireless communication and antennas (aerials);
• AT commands;
• ITU-T standard V.24/V.28;
• Micro controllers and programming;
• Electronic hardware design.
1.3 Manual Structure
The manual is composed of four parts:
Part 1- Overview
This section provides a broad overview of the GM28 and includes a list
of abbreviations used in the manual.
Part 2 - Integrating the Modem
This section describes each of the signals available on the GM28
modem, along with mechanical information. The section also provides
you with design guidelines and explains what is needed to
commercialise an application from a regulatory point of view.
Part 3 - Using AT Commands
This section lists all the AT commands relevant to the GM28, including
their associated parameters. The purpose of part 4 is to give you detailed
information about the function of each command in the AT command
set.
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
14
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2. GM28 Modem
2.1 Description
The dual band GSM 850/1900MHz GM28 is a GSM/GPRS serial
modem. The modem is a powerful and flexible device that can be used
in a wide range of telemetry and telematics applications that rely on the
remote exchange of data, voice, SMS or faxes via the GSM cellular
network.
Small and lightweight, the GM28 has standard connectors and an
integral SIM card reader making it easy and quick to integrate. As well
as providing a standard RS232 serial communication interface the
GM28 also has an audio interface allowing an analogue handset to be
connected. When the GM28 is integrated into an external application, a
wireless communications system is created.
A typical end-to-end system consists of a micro controller in an external
application communicating, via the GM28 modem, with a remote
terminal or host using the GSM network. The micro controller uses a set
of AT commands to control the modem, and to set up the end-to-end
communications link, via its 9-way RS232 serial interface.
GM28 serial modems are intended to be used by manufacturers, system
integrators, application developers and developers of a wide range of
equipment and business solutions, typically in the following fields:
• Security and alarms
• Vending
• Monitoring and control
• Utilities
• Fleet Management
2.2 Highlights
• Dual band, GSM 850/1900MHz, GSM/GPRS serial modem
• Flexible plug-and-play device
• Data: GPRS, HSCSD, CSD, SMS
• Voice: full rate, enhanced full rate, half rate
• SMS: mobile-originated, mobile-terminated, cell broadcast
• Fax: Group 3, Classes 1 & 2
• RS232 9-way serial interface
• 5V - 32V d.c. input
• 4-wire audio connection
• Antenna connection (FME male)
• FCC and PTCRB approved
2. GM28 MODEM
15
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.3 GM28 in a Communication System
Figure 2.1 illustrates the main blocks of a wireless communication
system using the GM28. It also shows the communication principles of
the system. The definitions in the figure, as used elsewhere in this
manual, are in accordance with the recommendations of GSM 07.07.
• The MS (mobile station) represents the GM28 modem plus SIM
card. The modem excluding SIM card, is known as the ME (mobile
equipment).
• The TE (terminal equipment) is a micro-controller (i.e., a computer)
and is a part of the application.
Figure 2.1 Main Blocks in a Wireless System
In accordance with the recommendations of ITU-T (International
Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardisation
Sector) V.24, the TE communicates with the MS over a serial interface.
The functions of the GM28 follow the recommendations provided by
ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) and ITU-T.
ETSI specifies a set of AT commands for controlling the GSM element
of the modem; these commands are supplemented by Sony Ericsson
specific commands.
To find out how to work with AT commands, see “Part 3: Using AT
Commands”, page 49.
TE
(DTE) AT commands to control MS
ME status, responses
MS
(GM28)
GSM Network
Application
Wireless Communication System
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
16
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Figure 2.2 illustrates the interface between the modem and the
application. The entire System Connector Interface is described in
detail in “Electrical Description”, page 28.
Figure 2.2 The Interface between the modem and the Application
Note! ITU-T standards define TE and TA as DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)
and DCE (Data Circuit Terminating Equipment) respectively.
Power
and signals
Audio
Serial data
TE
(Application)
MS
(GM28)
Antenna
connector
RJ11
RJ9
DB9
2. GM28 MODEM
17
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.4 Main Features and Services
The modem performs a set of telecom services (TS) according to GSM
standard phase 2+, ETSI and ITU-T. The services and functions of the
modem are implemented by issuing AT commands over the RS232
serial interface.
2.4.1 Types of Mobile Station
The GM28 is a dual band serial modem with the GSM radio
characteristics shown in the table below.
2.4.2 Short Message Service
The modem supports the following SMS services:
• Sending; MO (mobile-originated) with both PDU (protocol data
unit) and text mode supported.
• Receiving; MT (mobile-terminated) with both PDU and text mode
supported.
• CBM (cell broadcast message); a service in which a message is sent
to all subscribers located in one or more specific cells in the GSM
network (for example, traffic reports). This feature is network
dependent.
• SMS STATUS REPORT according to GSM 03.40.
• SMS COMMAND according to GSM 03.40.
The maximum length of an SMS message is 160 characters when using
7-bit encoding. For 8-bit data, the maximum length is 140 characters.
The modem supports up to 6 concatenated messages to extend this
function.
GM28 GSM850 GSM1900
Frequency Range (MHz) TX: 824-849
RX: 869-894
TX: 1850-1910
RX: 1930-1990
Channel spacing 200kHz 200kHz
Number of channels 123 carriers *8 (TDMA)
GSM: channels 128 to 251
298 carriers *8 (TDMA)
PCS: channels 512 to 810
Modulation GMSK GMSK
TX Phase Accuracy < 5º RMS phase error (burst) < 5º RMS phase error (burst)
Duplex spacing 45MHz 80MHz
Receiver sensitivity at
antenna connector
< –102dBm < –102dBm
Transmitter output power
at antenna connector
Class 5
0.8W (29dBm)
Class 1
1W (30dBm)
Automatic hand-over between GSM850 and GSM1900
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
18
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.4.3 Voice Calls
The GM28 offers the capability of mobile originated and mobile
terminated voice calls, as well as supporting emergency calls.
Multi-party, call waiting and call deflection features are available.
Some of these features are network-operator specific.
For the inter-connection of audio, the modem offers a balanced 4-wire
analogue interface.
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) is supported.
2.4.4 Data
The modem supports the following data protocols:
• GPRS (General Packet Radio Service).
Modems are Class B terminals, which provide simultaneous
activation and attachment of GPRS and GSM services. GM28
modems are GPRS class 8 (4+1) enabled devices, which are capable
of transmitting in one timeslot per frame (up link), and receiving at a
maximum of four timeslots per frame (down link).
• CSD (Circuit Switched Data).
GM28 modems are capable of establishing a CSD communication at
9.6kbps.
• HSCSD (High Speed Circuit Switched Data).
GM28 supports HSCSD class 2 (2+1) communication, with one
timeslot per frame capacity in the up link and two timeslots per
frame capacity in the down link.
2.4.5 Fax
The GM28 allows fax transmissions to be sent and received by
commercial software installed on the application computer. Group 3 fax
Classes 1 and 2 are supported.
2.4.6 Supplementary Services
• Call forwarding
• Call hold, waiting and multiparty
• Calling/called number identification
• Advice of charge
•USSD
• Alternate line service
• Customer service profile
• Preferred networks
• Operator selection
2. GM28 MODEM
19
LZT 123 7468 P1A
• Network registration
• Call barring
• Call transfer
2.4.7 Serial Communication
The GM28 enables an end-to-end communication path to be established
between the external telemetry/telematics application and a remote
terminal or host, via the GSM network. Once a path has been set up,
voice or data communication can take place. Serial data with flow
control according to the RS232 signalling protocol operates between the
modem and the external application.
Control of the GM28 is by the external application, via the RS232 serial
interface, using a set of AT commands. The GM28 supports the full set
of AT commands according to GSM 07.05 and GSM 07.07. It also
supports an extended set of Ericsson proprietary AT commands to add
extra functionality.
AT commands are used to operate the modem and have a broad range
of functions including:
• configuring general parameters of the GM28;
• setting up and controlling communications to and from the GSM
network;
• configuring the modem to communicate across the RS232 serial
interface;
• and obtaining GSM network status information.
For more detail on the AT commands supported by the GM28 see
“Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands”, page 259.
2.4.8 Interfacing with the GM28
The GM28 uses the following industry standard connectors to interface
with the external application and the GSM network;
• RJ11 (plug-in power supply connector)
• RJ9 (handset audio connector)
• Integral SIM card reader
• FME male (antenna connector)
• Sub-D socket, 9 pin (RS232 serial port)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
20
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.5 Service and Support
To contact customer support please use the details below:
Customer Support
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications
Maplewood Building
Chineham Business Park
Basingstoke
RG24 8YB
E-mail: modules.support@sonyericsson.com
or
modules.info@sonyericsson.com
Information about Sony Ericsson and its products is available on the
following web site:
http://www.sonyericsson.com/M2M
2.6 Precautions
The GM28 as a stand alone item is designed for indoor use only. To use
outside it must be integrated into a weatherproof enclosure. Do not
exceed the environmental and electrical limits as specified in
“Technical Data”, page 44.
3. ABBREVIATIONS
21
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanations
AMR Adaptive Multi Rate
CBM Cell Broadcast Message
CBS Cell Broadcast Service
CSD Circuit Switched Data
DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
EFR Enhanced Full Rate
EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
E-OTD Enhanced Observed Time Difference
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FR Full Rate
GPRS General Packet Radio Service
GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
HR Half Rate
HSCSD High Speed Circuit Switched Data
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications
Standardisation Sector
ME Mobile Equipment
MO Mobile Originated
MS Mobile Station
MT Mobile Terminated
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PTCRB PCS Type Certification Review Board
RF Radio Frequency
RLP Radio Link Protocol
RTC Real Time Clock
SIM Subscriber Identity Module
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
22
LZT 123 7468 P1A
SMS Short Message Service
TA Terminal Adapter
TE Terminal Equipment
TS Telecom Services
Abbreviation Explanations
Product Photo/Illustration
Part 2: Integrating the
Modem
25
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1. Mechanical Description
1.1 Overview
The pictures below show the mechanical design of the GM28 along
with the positions of the different connectors and mounting holes. The
GM28 case is made of durable PC/ABS plastic.
Figure 1.1 GM28 viewed from the left side
Figure 1.2 GM28 viewed from the right side
Antenna
connector
R 232 connectorS
LED
Access to
SIM card
Mounting hole (x2)
Audio
connector
Power
connector
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
26
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Please note the following:
• Mounting holes positioned at two of the corners make it possible to
securely bolt the modem into your application.
• Keypad, display, microphone, speaker and battery are not part of the
modem.
• The SIM card is mounted in the modem.
• The pins and electrical characteristics or the modem’s various
connectors are described in
“2. Electrical Description”, page 28.
• Information about the antenna connector is found in
“2.3 Antenna Connector”, page 31.
1. MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
27
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1.2 Physical Dimensions
Measurements are given in millimetres. See also “Technical Data”,
page 44.
71.5
66.4
77.4
26.2
11.0
55.3
45.3
10.6
11.0
9.0
51.0
(x2)
3.5
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
28
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2. Electrical Description
All electrical connections to the GM28 are designed to meet the
standard air (4kV) and contact (8kV) discharge ESD tests, of
EN 301 489-1.
The modem uses the following industry standard connectors:
• RJ11 6-way (power connector)
• RJ9 4-way (handset connector)
• SIM card reader
• FME male coaxial jack (antenna connector)
• Sub-D socket, 9 pin (RS232 serial port)
2.1 Power Connector
An RJ11 6-way connector, as shown and described below, serves as a
means of supplying and controlling d.c. power to the modem.
The supply voltage, VCC, required by the modem is in the range 5V -
32V d.c. Application of the supply voltage does not switch the modem
on. To do so an additional active-high control signal, TO_IN, must be
applied for > 0.2s.
A second active-high control signal, HR_IN, can be used to switch the
modem off when applied for 1 - 2 seconds, or can be used to perform a
hardware reset when applied for > 3.5s.
TO_IN and HR_IN are referenced to GND (pin 6 on the connector).
VCC and GND are reverse polarity and overvoltage protected.
654321
1 VCC
2 n/c
3 HR_IN
4 TO_IN
5 n/c
6 GND
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION
29
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The power connector electrical characteristics are listed below:
2.2 Audio Connector
A 4-way RJ9 connector, as shown below, allows a telephone handset to
be plugged into the modem, giving access to the microphone and
earpiece signals. The connector may also be used to drive other
analogue audio sub-systems or devices.
Although the GM28 is pre-configured to work with a range of handsets,
the audio interface is flexible and its performance can be configured,
using AT commands, to match a particular handset or audio subsystem.
Pin Signal Dir Limits Description
1VCC I5 - 32V Positive power input
2- - - No connection
3HR_IN I–0.5 - 32V Active high control line used to switch
off or reset the modem
VIH > 5V, VIL < 2V
Power off: 1s < t < 2s
Hard reset: t > 3.5s
4 TO_IN I –0.5 - 32V Active high control line used to switch
on the modem
VIH > 5V, VIL < 2V
Power on: t > 0.2s
5 - - - No connection
6 GND I - Negative power (ground) input and
return path for TO_IN and HR_IN
4321
1 MICN
2 BEARN
3 BEARP
4 MICP
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
30
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Audio signal descriptions are listed below:
MICP and MICN are balanced differential microphone input signals.
These inputs are compatible with an electret microphone.
BEARP and BEARN are the speaker output signals. These are
differential-mode outputs. The electrical characteristics are given in the
table below.
The following table shows the ear piece impedances that can be
connected to BEARP and BEARN.
Note! Compliance with AMR may be required by certain network operators.
Pin Signal Dir Description
1MICN IMicrophone negative input
2 BEARN O Earpiece negative output
3BEARP OEarpiece positive output
4 MICP I Microphone positive input
Parameter Limit
Output level (differential) t4.0Vpp
Output level (dynamic load = 32:)t2.8Vpp
Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level d5%
Offset, BEARP to BEARN ±30mV
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation t40dB
Ear piece model Impedance Tolerance
Dynamic ear piece [32:+ 800µH] // 100pF ±20%
Dynamic ear piece [150:+ 800µH] // 100pF ±20%
Piezo ear piece 1k:+ 60nF ±20%
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION
31
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.3 Antenna Connector
The antenna connector allows transmission of radio frequency (RF)
signals between the modem and an external customer-supplied antenna.
The modem is fitted with a 50: FME male coaxial jack as shown
below.
The table below shows the antenna electrical characteristics:
Parameter Limit Description
Nominal impedance 50: (SWR better than
2.5:1)
Output Power
2 Watt peak (Class 4) GSM850
1 Watt peak (Class 1) GSM1900
Static Sensitivity
Better than –102dBm GSM850
Better than –102dBm GSM1900
GND
RF Signal
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
32
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.4 SIM Card Reader
The GM28 is fitted with a SIM card reader designed for 3V and 5V SIM
cards. It is the flip-up type which is lockable in the horizontal position
and is accessed through a removable panel as shown below.
The SIM card reader includes a SIM presence switch. This ensures that
when a SIM card is inserted or removed while the GM28 is turned ON,
it will reset.
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION
33
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.5 RS232 Serial Port
The modem supports a standard RS232 serial interface (EIA/TIA 574)
via its 9 pin Sub-D connector, shown below. In line with serial
communication terminology the GM28 serial modem should be
considered as the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) and the
external application or computer as the data terminating equipment
(DTE).
The electrical characteristics of the serial port signals are shown below:
Pin Signal Dir Voltage
levels
Description
1DCD O> +4V
< –4V
Data carrier detect
2 RD O > +4V
< –4V
Received data
3TD I> 2V
< 0.8V
Transmitted data
4 DTR I > 2V
< 0.8V
Data terminal ready
5GND -0V Ground connection
6DSR O > +4V
< –4V
Data set ready
7RTS I> 2V
< 0.8V
Request to send
8 CTS O > +4V
< –4V
Clear to send
9RI O> +4V
< –4V
Ring indicator
9
1 DCD
2RD
3TD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7RTS
8 CTS
9RI
76
54321
8
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
34
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.5.1 Serial Data
The modem supports the standard data character format of 1 start bit,
8 bit data, no parity plus 1 stop bit, in total 10 bits per character.
2.5.2 Serial Data Signals - RD, TD
The default baud rate is 9.6kbps, however higher bit rates up to 460kbps
are supported. At start-up the GM28 transmits and receives data at the
default rate of 9.6kbps in either standard AT mode or binary mode (the
first received data - AT or binary format - determines the operating
mode). When reprogramming, the transmission rate is automatically
negotiated by the programming application. Speeds up to 460kbps are
supported.
Serial Data From Modem (RD)
RD is an output signal that the modem uses to send data to the
application.
Serial Data To Modem (TD)
TD is an input signal, used by the application to send data to the modem.
2.5.3 Control Signals - RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD, RI
RTS and CTS are capable of transmitting at 1/10th of the data
transmission speed for data rates up to 460kbps (byte-oriented flow
control mechanism).
Request to Send (RTS)
Used to condition the DCE for data transmission. The default level is
high by internal pull up.
The exact behaviour of RTS is defined by an AT command. Software
or hardware control can be selected. Hardware flow is the default
control.
The application must pull RTS low to communicate with the modem.
The modem will respond by asserting CTS low, indicating it is ready for
communication.
Clear To Send (CTS)
CTS indicates that the DCE is ready to transmit data. The default level
is high. You can define the exact behaviour of CTS through an AT
command, and can select software or hardware flow control.
2. ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION
35
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
DTR indicates that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive data. It also
acts as a hardware ‘hang-up’, terminating calls when switched high.
The signal is active low. You can define the exact behaviour of DTR
with an AT command.
The DTR line can also be used to switch on the modem when activated
for 0.2 seconds. The DTR line must be deactivated prior to switching
off the modem to ensure it switches off (powers down) correctly.
Data Set Ready (DSR)
An active DSR signal is sent from the modem to the application (DTE)
to confirm that a communications path has been established. DSR has
two modes of operation, which can be set using the AT command
AT&S.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
DCD indicates that the DCE is receiving a valid carrier (data signal)
when low. You can define the exact behaviour of DCD with an AT
command.
Ring Indicator (RI)
RI indicates that a ringing signal is being received by the DCE when
low. You can define the exact behaviour or RI with an AT command.
2.6 Real Time Clock
The GM28 contains a real time clock (RTC) to maintain accurate
timekeeping and to enable “timestamping” of messages.
The RTC is powered when d.c. power is connected to the modem AND
the modem is switched on. If the d.c. supply fails, a stored energy device
within the GM28 provides back-up power to maintain the RTC for at
least 12 hours.
2.7 Software Updates
It is possible and sometimes necessary to update the GM28 software.
Updates must be carried out by a Sony Ericsson approved technician.
Please contact your supplier for details (see “Service and Support”,
page 20).
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
36
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3. Operation
3.1 Switching On the Modem
There are two ways to switch on the modem, once power is applied.
• either assert TO_IN high for > 0.2s;
• or activate the RS232 control line DTR, high for > 0.2s.
The modem is fully operational after 4 seconds. Logging onto a network
may take longer than this and is outside the control of the modem.
The modem can be configured to start up at the time power is applied
by permanently tying power connector signals TO_IN (pin 4) and VCC
(pin 1) together. In this case DTR must be used to switch the modem on
again after it has been switched off or reset, while power is still applied.
3.2 Switching Off the Modem
There are two ways to switch off (power down) the modem as described
below:
• either use the AT+CFUN command;
• or assert HR_IN high for 1 - 2 seconds. A delay of up to 10s is
experienced as the modem logs off the network.
Note! The DTR line must be deactivated prior to switching off the modem to
ensure the unit switches off correctly.
3.3 Resetting the Modem
A full system reset, independent of the status of the software, may be
applied to the modem as follows:
• assert HR_IN high for > 3.5s.
3. OPERATION
37
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.4 Operating States/LED
The modem has a green LED, as depicted below, which is used to
indicate various operating states. These states are described in
following table.
Notes! Switch off (Power Down): DC power is applied but the modem is
switched OFF.
Standby: The GM28 is switched ON and camped on to the network. No
call in progress.
Talk: The GM28 is switched ON and a voice/data call is in progress.
Operating State LED Status
After switching on the modem On after 4s
Switch off (Power down) or power removed Off
Standby or talk Flashing
No network, network search, no SIM card, no PIN
entered
On
LED
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
38
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4. Hints for Integrating the Modem
This chapter gives you advice and helpful hints on how to integrate the
GM28 into your application from a hardware perspective.
Please read and consider the information under the following headings
before starting your integration work:
• Safety advice and precautions.
• Installation of the modem.
• Antenna.
4.1 Safety Advice and Precautions
4.1.1 General
• Always ensure that use of the modem is permitted. The modem may
present a hazard if used in proximity to personal medical electronic
devices. As a rule, the modem must not be used in hospitals, airports
or planes.
• Avoid exposing the modem to lighted cigarettes, naked flames or to
extreme hot or cold temperature.
• You are responsible for observing your country’s safety standards,
and where applicable the relevant wiring rules.
• Never use the modem at a gas station, refuelling point, blasting area
or in any other environment where explosives may be present.
• Operating the modem close to other electronic devices, such as
antennas, television sets, and radios may cause electromagnetic
interference.
• Never try to dismantle the modem yourself. There are no
components inside the modem that can be serviced by the user. If
you attempt to dismantle the modem, you may invalidate the
warranty.
• To protect power supply cables and meet the fire safety requirements
when the unit is powered from a battery or a high current supply,
connect a fast 1.25A fuse in line with the positive supply.
• Do not connect any incompatible component or product to the
GM28. Note, Sony Ericsson does not warrant against defects, non-
conformities or deviations caused thereby.
4.1.2 SIM Card
• Before handling the SIM card in your application, ensure that you
are not charged with static electricity. Use proper precautions to
avoid electrostatic discharges.
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODEM
39
LZT 123 7468 P1A
• When the SIM card hatch is opened, the SIM card connectors lie
exposed under the SIM card holder. CAUTION: Do not touch these
connectors! If you do, you may release an electrical discharge that
could damage the modem or the SIM card.
• When designing your application, the SIM card’s accessibility
should be taken into account. We always recommend that you have
the SIM card protected by a PIN code. This will ensure that the SIM
card cannot be used by an unauthorized person.
4.1.3 Antenna
• If the antenna is to be mounted outside, consider the risk of
lightning. Follow the instructions provided by the antenna
manufacturer.
• Never connect more than one modem to a single antenna. The
modem can be damaged by radio frequency energy from the
transmitter of another modem.
• Like any mobile station, the antenna of the modem emits radio
frequency energy. To avoid EMI (electromagnetic interference), you
must determine whether the application itself, or equipment in the
application’s proximity, needs further protection against radio
emission and the disturbances it might cause. Protection is secured
either by shielding the surrounding electronics or by moving the
antenna away from the electronics and the external signals cable.
• The modem and antenna may be damaged if either come into contact
with ground potentials other than the one in your application.
Beware, ground potential are not always what they appear to be.
• If the application containing the GM28 uses an antenna which is less
than 20cm away from any part of the user’s body, integrators are
legally obliged to publish SAR figures for the product. SAR testing
is the responsibility of the system integrator.
• Even if SAR measurements are not required it is considered good
practice to insert a warning in any manual produced, indicating it is a
radio product and that care should be taken.
• The GM28 module is FCC approved for fixed and mobile
applications. If the final product after integration is intended for
portable use, a new application and FCC ID is required.
4.2 Installation of the Modem
4.2.1 Where to Install the Modem
There are several conditions which need to be taken into consideration
when designing your application as they might affect the modem and its
function. They are:
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
40
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Environmental Conditions
The modem must be installed so that the environmental conditions
stated in the Technical Data chapter, such as temperature, humidity and
vibration are satisfied. Additionally, the electrical specifications in the
Technical Data section must not be exceeded.
Signal Strength
The modem has to be placed in a way that ensures sufficient signal
strength. To improve signal strength, the antenna can be moved to
another position. Signal strength may depend on how close the modem
is to a radio base station. You must ensure that the location at which you
intend to use the modem, is within the network coverage area.
Degradation in signal strength can be the result of a disturbance from
another source, for example an electronic device in the immediate
vicinity. More information about possible communication disturbances
can be found in section 4.3.5, page 43.
When an application is completed, you can verify signal strength by
issuing the AT command AT+CSQ. See “AT+CSQ Signal Strength”,
page 87.
Tip! Before installing the modem, use an ordinary mobile telephone to check
a possible location for it. In determining the location for the modem and
antenna, you should consider signal strength as well as cable length
Connection of Components to GM28
The integrator is responsible for the final integrated system. Incorrectly
designed or installed, external components may cause radiation limits to
be exceeded. For instance, improperly made connections or improperly
installed antennas can disturb the network and lead to malfunctions in
the modem or equipment.
Network and Subscription
• Before your application is used, you must ensure that your chosen
network provides the necessary telecommunication services.
Contact your service provider to obtain the necessary information.
• If you intend to use SMS in the application, ensure this is included in
your (voice) subscription.
• Consider the choice of the supplementary services described in
section “2.4.2 Short Message Service”, page 17.
• Please be aware that compliance with AMR may be required by
certain network operators.
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODEM
41
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.2.2 How to Install the Modem
Power Supply
• Use a high-quality power supply cable with low resistance. This
ensures that the voltages at the connector pins are within the allowed
range, even during the maximum peak current.
• When the unit is powered from a battery or a high current supply,
connect a fast 1.25A fuse in line with the positive supply. This
protects the power cabling and modem.
Securing the modem
• Before securing the modem take into account the amount of
additional space required for the mating connectors and cables that
will be used in the application.
• Where access is restricted, it may be easier to connect all the cables
to the modem prior to securing it in the application.
• Securely attach the GM28 modem to the host application using two
3mm diameter pan-head screws of appropriate length as shown
below.
Caution! Do not exceed a torque of 25Ncm when tightening the fixings screws.
Excessive torque applied to the screws can crack the plastic case.
4.3 Antenna
4.3.1 General
The antenna is the component in your system that maintains the radio
link between the network and the modem. Since the antenna transmits
and receives electromagnetic energy, its efficient function will depend
on:
• the type of antenna (for example, circular or directional);
• the placement of the antenna;
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
42
LZT 123 7468 P1A
• communication disturbances in the vicinity in which the antenna
operates.
In the sections below, issues concerning antenna type, antenna
placement, antenna cable, and possible communication disturbances are
addressed.
In any event, you should contact your local antenna manufacturer for
additional information concerning antenna type, cables, connectors,
antenna placement, and the surrounding area. You should also
determine whether the antenna needs to be grounded or not. Your local
antenna manufacturer might be able to design a special antenna suitable
for your the application.
4.3.2 Antenna Type
Make sure that you choose the right type of antenna for the modem.
Consider the following requirements:
• the antenna must be designed for the dual frequency bands in use:
GSM850/1900;
• the impedance of the antenna and antenna cable must be 50:;
• the antenna output-power handling must be a minimum of 2W;
• the VSWR value should be less than 3:1 to avoid damage to the
modem.
4.3.3 Antenna Placement
The antenna should be placed away from electronic devices or other
antennas. The recommended minimum distance between adjacent
antennas, operating in a similar radio frequency band, is at least 50cm.
If signal strength is weak, it is useful to face a directional antenna at the
closest radio base station. This can increase the strength of the signal
received by the modem.
The modem’s peak output power can reach 2W. RF field strength varies
with antenna type and distance. At 10cm from the antenna the field
strength may be up to 70V/m and at 1m it will have reduced to 7V/m.
4.3.4 The Antenna Cable
Use 50:impedance low-loss cable and high-quality 50:impedance
connectors (frequency range up to 2GHz) to avoid RF losses. Ensure
that the antenna cable is as short as possible.
The Voltage Standing-Wave Ratio (VSWR) may depend on the
effectiveness of the antenna, cable and connectors. In addition, if you
use an adapter between the antenna cable and the antenna connector, it
is crucial that the antenna cable is a high-quality, low-loss cable.
4. HINTS FOR INTEGRATING THE MODEM
43
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Minimize the use of extension cables, connectors and adapters. Each
additional cable, connector or adapter causes a loss of signal power.
4.3.5 Possible Communication Disturbances
Possible communication disturbances include the following:
•Noise can be caused by electronic devices and radio transmitters.
•Path-loss occurs as the strength of the received signal steadily
decreases in proportion to the distance from the transmitter.
•Shadowing is a form of environmental attenuation of radio signals
caused by hills, buildings, trees or even vehicles. This can be a
particular problem inside buildings, especially if the walls are thick
and reinforced.
•Multi-path fading is a sudden decrease or increase in the signal
strength. This is the result of interference caused when direct and
reflected signals reach the antenna simultaneously. Surfaces such as
buildings, streets, vehicles, etc., can reflect signals.
•Hand-over occurs as you move from one cell to another in the GSM
network. Your mobile application call is transferred from one cell to
the next. Hand-over can briefly interfere with communication and
may cause a delay, or at worst, a disruption.
4.4 Attachments
The GM28 has been FCC certified using a number of attachments
including:
1. AC-DC Power Adaptor with Customized DC Lead
(Model # AD-0901000BS)
Input 230Va.c., 50Hz, 2m mains lead
Output: 9Vd.c. 1A, 2m d.c. lead with RJ11 connector. CE marked.
2. Tri-band GSM Antenna (GSM/PCN/1.9GHz)
(Model # DG300-FME/F)
Covert fit spider patch antenna, self-adhesive pad, 0dBi, 2m RG174
cable with FME female connector.
3. RS232 9-way Serial Cable
(Model # C-E-RS232-2M)
2m, 9-way cable, DB9 (female) to DB9 (male) connectors.
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
44
LZT 123 7468 P1A
5. Technical Data
Data Features
Short Message Service Features
Voice Features
Fax Features
CSD Up to 9.6kbps
HSCSD (2+1) Up to 19.2kbps
GPRS Class B (4+1)
- P channels
- Coding schemes CS1 - CS4
85.6kbps (subject to network support and
terminal location)
GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
SMS
Text and PDU
Point to point (MT/MO)
Cell broadcast
concatenation of up to 6 SMS
Full Rate, Enhanced Full Rate and Half Rate
(FR/EFR/HR)
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF
AMR currently unsupported
Group 3
Class 1 and 2
5. TECHNICAL DATA
45
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Data Storage
Power Supply
Power Consumption
Power Down Mode
Standby Mode (typical)
Talk Mode (typical)
Notes! Power Down Mode: DC power is applied but the modem is switched
OFF.
Standby Mode: The GM28 is switched ON and camped on to the
network. No call in progress.
Talk Mode: The GM28 is switched ON and a voice/data call is in
progress.
The power consumption during transmission in Talk Mode is measured
at maximum transmitted power.
SMS storage capacity 40 in ME
In addition, the unit can handle as many
SMS as the SIM can store
Phone book capacity 100
Supply voltage range 5 - 32V d.c.
Supply voltage 5V 12V 32V Vdc
Av Max Av Max Av Max
515 515 20 50 µA
Frequency Paging rate Av Peak Av Peak Av Peak
850MHz 226 110 943 620 mA
1900MHz 2 26 120 9 45 6 19 mA
Frequency Power Level Av Peak Av Peak Av Peak
850MHz 5220 1230 90 520 40 200 mA
1900MHz 0 170 960 70 350 30 140 mA
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
46
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The power consumption in Standby Mode is measured at the maximum
paging rate.
Radio Specifications
Audio Specifications
SIM Card Reader
Frequency range GM28: GSM 850MHz and 1900MHz (dual band)
Maximum RF output
power
2W (850MHz) and 1W (1900MHz)
Antenna impedance 50:
Static sensitivity Better than –102dBm
E-OTD Currently unsupported in GM28
Parameter Limit
Output level (differential) t4.0Vpp
Output level (dynamic load = 32:)t2.8Vpp
Distortion at 1kHz and maximum output level d5%
Offset, BEARP to BEARN ±30mV
Ear-piece mute-switch attenuation t40dB
Ear piece model Impedance Tolerance
Dynamic ear piece [32:+ 800µH] // 100pF ±20%
Dynamic ear piece [150:+ 800µH] // 100pF ±20%
Piezo ear piece 1k:+ 60nF ±20%
Voltage type Support for 3 V and 5 V SIM cards
5. TECHNICAL DATA
47
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Electrical Connectors and LED
Mechanical Specification
Plug-in power supply
connector
RJ11 6-way
Handset audio connector RJ9 4-way
Antenna connector FME male
RS232 port Sub-D socket, 9 pin
LED Green
Length 77.4mm
Width 66.4mm
Height 26.2mm
Weight <130g
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
48
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Environmental specifications
Certification
Operating temperature
range
–25°C to +55°C
Storage temperature
range
–40°C to +85°C
Relative humidity 5 - 95%, non-condensing
Stationary vibration,
sinusoidal
Displacement: 7.5mm
Acceleration amplitude: 20m/s² and 40m/s²
Frequency range: 2-8Hz, 8-200Hz, 200-500Hz
Stationary vibration,
random
Acceleration spectral density (m²/s²):
0.96, 2.88, 0.96
Frequency range:
5-10Hz, 10-200Hz, 200-500Hz, 60min/axis
Non-stationary vibration,
including shock
Shock response spectrum I, peak acceleration:
3 shocks in each axis and direction;
300m/s², 11ms
Shock response spectrum II, peak acceleration:
3 shocks in each axis and direction;
1000m/s², 6ms
Bump Acceleration: 250m/s²
Free fall transportation 1.2m
Rolling pitching
transportation
Angle: ±35degrees; period: 8s
Static load 10kPa
Low air pressure/high air
pressure
70kPa/106kPa
FCC Certification
Part 15
Part 22
Part 24
Approved to PTCRB according to NAPRD.03 and GSM 3GPP TS 51.010-1
Product Photo/Illustration
Part 3: Using AT Commands
51
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1. Introduction to AT Commands
1.1 Overview
AT commands, issued from a computer in your application are used to
control and implement the functions of the modem.
Using AT commands, the following actions are possible:
• Control of DCE
•GPRS
• Call control
• Supplementary Service
• SIM application tool kit
The GM28 contains a large number of Ericsson-specific commands in
addition to those implemented in accordance with the GSM and ITU-T
recommendations. These commands are provided to enhance the
functions of the modem. The Ericsson-specific commands are identified
by the asterisk that precedes the command (see the syntax description
provided below).
1.2 Syntax Description
This section provides a brief description of the syntax used for the
GM28, AT command set. See the ITU-T recommendation V.25ter for
additional information.
1.2.1 Conventions
In this manual, the following conventions are used to explain the AT
commands.
<command> The name of the command that is to be entered.
<parameter> The parameter values that are defined for a certain
command.
<CR> The command line is terminated by the Carriage
Return (or Enter key) or ATS3 command.
<LF> Line feed character or ATS4 command.
< > The term enclosed in angle brackets is a syntactical
element. The brackets do not appear in the command
line.
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
52
LZT 123 7468 P1A
[ ] Square brackets are used to indicate that a certain item
is optional. For example, sub-parameters of a
command or an optional part of a response. The
brackets do not appear in the command line.
Value The default values of the supported parameters are
indicated by using bold text when presenting the
value.
• Other characters, including ‘?’, ‘ ’, parenthesis, etc., appear in
commands and responses as written.
• The final result codes OK, ERROR, +CME ERROR: <err> and
CMS ERROR:<err> (see sections 1.2.3, AT Response Syntax and
1.3, Error Codes) are not listed under “Possible Responses” for each
AT command.
• OK and ERROR are listed if these are the only possible responses.
1.2.2 AT Command Syntax
The AT standard is a line-oriented command language. Each command
is made up of the following three elements:
• the prefix;
• the body;
• the termination character.
The prefix consists of the letters “AT”, which are derived from the first
two letters of the word attention. The body is made up of the command,
the parameter, and if applicable the associated values.
Commands may be combined in the same command line. Spaces
between the individual bodies are ignored.
Basic Syntax Command
The format of basic syntax commands is as follows:
AT<command>[=][<parameter>]<OK>
Example! ATL=0<CR> (sets the volume of the speaker)
Additional commands may follow a command on the same command
line without any character being required for separation. For the
command D parameters, see the description for the command in
question.
A version of the basic syntax is:
AT<command><parameter>
Extended Syntax Command
• AT+<command>= [<parameter>]
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS
53
LZT 123 7468 P1A
• AT*<command>=[<parameter>]
Example! AT+CFUN=0<CR> (powers down the modem)
If several values are included in the command, they are separated by
commas. It is also possible to enter commands with no values.
Additional commands may follow an extended syntax command on the
same command line if a semicolon (; IRA 3B) is inserted after the
preceeding extended command as a separator.
Read Command Syntax
The read command is used to check the current values of
parameters. Type ‘?’, after the command line:
• AT+<command>?
• AT*<command>?
• AT<command>?
Example! AT+CSCS?<CR> (show current character set)
<CR>“IRA”<CR>(information text response)
<CR>OK<CR>(final result code response)
Test Command Syntax
The test command is used to test whether the command has been
implemented or to give information about the type of subparameters it
contains. Type ‘?’, after the command line:
• AT+<command>=?
• AT*<command>=?
Example! AT+CPAS=?<CR> (shows supported values for the response
parameters)
<CR>CPAS: (0, 3, 4, 129, 130, 131)<CR> (supported values)
<CR>OK<CR> (final result code)
If the indicated <parameter> is not recognized, the result code ERROR
is issued.
Note! Possible responses are indicated both as <command>:(list of
supported<parameter>) and (in most cases) the actual range of the
parameter values.
1.2.3 AT Response Syntax
The default mode response shown below, is in text mode. See the
command V for further details.
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
54
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Possible formats for the result codes are:
• Basic format result code, such as OK. The Basic result code also has
a numerical equivalent.
• Extended format result code, prefixed with a plus sign (+) or an
asterisk (*):
– AT+<command>: <parameter >
– AT*<command>: <parameter>
where the <parameter> is the result code value, note that a single
space character separates the colon character from the <parameter>
If several values are included in the result code, they are separated by
commas. It is also possible that a result code has no value. The
extended syntax result codes have no numerical equivalent. They are
always issued in alphabetical form.
• Information text response may contain multiple lines separated by
<CR>. The TE detects the end of informational text responses by
looking for a final result code response, such as OK.
There are two types of result code responses as outlined below:
Final Result Code
A final result code indicates to the TE that execution of the command
is completed and another command may be issued.
• If you type an implemented AT command, you should get the result
code OK.
• If you type an AT command that is not implemented, or which had
the wrong parameter or syntax, you will get an error result code. It is
ERROR or, for example, +<command> ERROR followed by an
error code.
Final result codes are:
Value General meaning
OK Command executed, no errors
ERROR Invalid command or command line too long
NO DIALTONE No dialling possible, wrong mode
BUSY Remote station busy
NO ANSWER Connection completion time-out
NO CARRIER Link not established or disconnected
Unsolicited Result Code
Unsolicited result codes indicate the occurrence of an event not directly
associated with a command being issued from the TE.
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS
55
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1.3 Error Codes
1.3.1 +CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)
This final result code is similar to the regular ERROR result code. If
+CME ERROR: <err> is the result code for any of the commands in a
command line, none of the commands in the same command line will
be executed (neither ERROR nor OK result code shall be returned as a
result of a completed command line execution). The format of <err> can
be either numerical or alphabetical, and is set with the +CMEE
command.
The table below provides the numerical values for the parameter <err>.
<err> Description Syntax
0Phone failure
1 No connection to phone
2Phone -adaptor link reserved
3 Operation not allowed
4Operation not supported
5 PH-SIM PIN required
10 SIM not inserted
11 SIM PIN required
12 SIM PUK required
13 SIM failure
14 SIM busy
15 SIM wrong
16 Incorrect password
17 SIM PIN2 required
18 SIM PUK2 required
20 Memory full
21 Invalid index
22 Not found
23 Memory failure
24 Text string too long
25 Invalid characters in text string
26 Dial string too long
27 Invalid characters in dial string
30 No network service
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
56
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1.3.2 +CMS ERROR (Message Service Failure Result Code)
This final result code indicates an error related to mobile equipment or
to the network. The operation is similar to the ERROR result code.
None of the following commands in the same command line will be
executed. Neither ERROR nor OK result code will be returned. ERROR
is returned normally when an error is related to syntax or invalid
parameters. Nevertheless, it always appears when a command fails.
The syntax is as follows:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Values for the <err> parameter are described in the following table.
31 Network time-out
32 Network not allowed - emergency calls only
100 Unknown
101- 255 Reserved by ETS
<err> Description Syntax
<err> Description
0 - 127 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values
128 - 255 GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values
300 ME failure
301 SMS service of ME reserved
302 Operation not allowed
303 Operation not supported
304 Invalid PDU mode parameter
305 Invalid text mode parameter
310 SIM not inserted
311 SIM PIN required
312 PH-SIM PIN required
313 SIM failure
314 SIM busy
315 SIM wrong
316 SIM PUK required
317 SIM PIN2 required
318 SIM PUK2 required
320 Memory failure
1. INTRODUCTION TO AT COMMANDS
57
LZT 123 7468 P1A
1.4 Examples on How to Use the AT Commands
After every group of AT commands there is a section where some of the
more complicated commands are exemplified. For a detailed
description of the command in question (valid parameter values, AT
command syntax and Response syntax) you are recommended to see its
own descriptive section.
321 Invalid memory index
322 Memory full
330 SMSC address unknown
331 No network service
332 Network time-out
340 No +CNMA acknowledgment expected
500 Unknown error
- 511 Other values in range 256 - 511 are reserved
512- Manufacturer specific
<err> Description
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
58
LZT 123 7468 P1A
59
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2. Call Control
2.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
2.2 ATA Answer Incoming Call
Answer and initiate connection to an incoming call.
Description Command Possible Responses
Answer an incoming
call
ATA •CONNECT
• CONNECT <text>
•NO CARRIER
•ERROR
•OK
<text> Description
19200 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)
9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s
4800 Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s
2400 Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
60
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.3 ATD Dial
Used to initiate a phone connection, which may be data or voice (phone
number terminated by semicolon). The phone number used to establish
the connection will consist of digits and modifiers, or a stored number
specification.
If the dial string is followed by a semicolon this informs the phone that
the number is a voice rather than a data number.
If the dial string is omitted, and the semicolon included, the command
instructs the ME to do a network detect. If the network is available OK
is returned.
Abortability:
Aborting an ATD command is accomplished by the transmission from
the DTE to the DCE of any character. A single character shall be
sufficient to abort the command in progress; however, characters
Description Command Possible Responses
• Originate a call and
dial the phone
number specified in
the command as
<dial_string>
or
•Do a network
detect
ATD<dial_string>[;] •CONNECT
• CONNECT <text>
•NO CARRIER
•ERROR
• NO DIAL TONE
•BUSY
•OK
Dial the phone number
stored in the mobile
phone which is
located by the index
<I>
ATD>ME<I>[;] • CONNECT
• CONNECT <text>
•NO CARRIER
•ERROR
• NO DIAL TONE
•BUSY
•OK
Dial the phone number
stored in the SIM card
which is located by the
index <I>
ATD>SM<I>[;] •CONNECT
• CONNECT <text>
•NO CARRIER
•ERROR
• NO DIAL TONE
•BUSY
•OK
Dial the phone number
stored in the Last
dialled number list on
the SIM card, which is
located by the index
<I>
The most recently
dialled number is
assumed to have
<I>="1"
ATD>LD<I>[;] • CONNECT
• CONNECT <text>
•NO CARRIER
•ERROR
• NO DIAL TONE
•BUSY
•OK
Redial the last phone
number dialled.
Ericsson specific
ATDL[;] ...
2. CALL CONTROL
61
LZT 123 7468 P1A
transmitted during the first 125 milliseconds after transmission of the
termination character are ignored. This is to allow the DTE to append
additional control characters such as line feed after the command line
termination character.
<dial_string> Description
“0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 * # +”
Valid characters for origination
W The W modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
,The comma modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
T The T modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
PThe P modifier is ignored but is included only for
compatibility purposes
<Final Result
Code>
Description
CONNECT If connection is successfully established, only valid for data
connections
CONNECT
<text>
If connection is successfully established, only valid for data
connections
NO CARRIER Unable to establish a connection or the connection
attempt was aborted by the user
ERROR An unexpected error occurred while trying to establish the
connection
NO DIALTONE The mobile phone is being used for a voice call or is not
within coverage of the network
BUSY The phone number called is engaged, valid for data and
voice connections
OK Only valid for voice connections
<text> Description
19200 Connected with data bit rate of 19200 bits/s (HSCSD)
9600 Connected with data bit rate of 9600 bits/s
4800 Connected with data bit rate of 4800 bits/s
2400 Connected with data bit rate of 2400 bits/s
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
62
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.4 ATH Hang up
Signals the MS to terminate an active call.
2.5 ATO Return to Online Data Mode
Switch to the on-line data mode from the on-line command mode during
an active call. Returns ERROR when not in on-line command mode.
2.6 ATP Select Pulse Dialling
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It
would normally cause the next D command to use pulses when dialling
the number.
2.7 ATT Select Tone Dialling
Command is ignored, and is implemented for compatibility only. It
would normally cause the next D command to use tones when dialling
the number.
Description Command Possible Responses
Terminate the call ATH •ERROR
•OK
Description Command Possible Responses
Return to on-line data
mode
ATO[<value>] •CONNECT
• CONNECT <text>
•NO CARRIER
•ERROR
<value> Description
0Return to on-line data state from on-line command
Description Command Possible Responses
Select pulse dialling ATP OK
Show if the command
is supported?
ATP=? OK
Description Command Possible Responses
Select tone dialling ATT OK
Show if the command
is supported?
ATT=? OK
2. CALL CONTROL
63
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.8 ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control
Defines if the dial-tone detection and busy-tone detection are to be used
during a call set-up.
Note! If there is no network available the <n> parameter will decide if “NO
DIALTONE” or “NO CARRIER” will be returned. If the call recipient
is busy, the <n> parameter will decide if “BUSY” or “NO CARRIER”
will be returned.
2.9 AT+CHUP Hang up Call
Causes the TA to hang-up the current call of the ME.
If no call is present, but an incoming call is notified, then the incoming
call shall be rejected.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set call progress
monitoring control
ATX=[<n>] or ATX[<n>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATX? X: <n>
Show if the command
is supported?
ATX=? X: (list of supported
<n>s)
<n> Description
0Body and dial tone detection off. No line speed reported
on connection
1 Body and dial tone detection off. Report line speed on
connection
2Busy detection on and dial tone detection off. Report line
speed on connection
3 Busy detect off and dial tone on. Report line speed on
connection
4Busy detect and dial tone detection on. Report line
speed on connection. Default value
Description Command Possible Responses
Request hang-up AT+CHUP •OK
•ERROR
Show if the commands
is supported
AT+CHUP=? • OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
64
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.10 AT+CMOD Call Mode
Selects the call mode of further dialing commands (D) or for next
answering command (A). Mode can be either single or alternating. In
this ETS, terms “alternating mode” and “alternating call” refer to all
GSM bearer and teleservices that incorporate more than one basic
service (voice, data, fax) within one call.
When single mode is selected the call originating and hang-up
procedures are similar to procedures specified in ITU-T
Recommendations V.25ter, T.31 and T.32. In GSM there can be voice
followed by data (refer to GSM 02.02), alternating voice/data (refer to
GSM 02.02) and alternating voice/fax calls (refer to GSM 02.03).
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Note! +CMOD is set to zero after a successfully completed alternating mode
call. It is set to zero also after a failed answering. The power-up, factory
(&F) and user resets (Z), also set the value to zero. This reduces the
possibility that alternating mode calls are originated or answered
accidentally.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request Call Mode AT+CMOD=[<mode>] •OK
•ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+CMOD? • +CMOD: <mode>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMOD=? • +CMOD: (list of
supported
<mode>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Single mode. Default value.
In order to avoid accidental originating or answering of
alternating calls is <mode> set to single mode in following
cases:
- after a successfully completed alternating mode call;
- after a unsuccessful answering;
- after successfully execution of the commands &F and Z
2. CALL CONTROL
65
LZT 123 7468 P1A
2.11 AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up
Selects whether ATH or “drop DTR” causes a voice connection to be
disconnected or not. Voice connection also includes alternating mode
calls that are currently in voice mode.
Note! When <mode>=2, this command must be viewed in conjunction with
the V.25ter command &D, or &D will be ignored.
2.12 AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation
This command allows the transmission of DTMF tones. These tones
may be used, for example, when announcing the start of a recording
period. The command is write only. In this profile of commands, the
command does not operate in data or fax modes of operation
(+FCLASS=0,1,2-7).
Note! The ATD-command is used only for dialing. It is not possible to
generate arbitrary DTMF tones using the ATD command.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Command +CVHU=[<mode>] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
Read command +CVHU? • +CVHU: <mode>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Test if the command is
supported
+CVHU=? +CVHU: (list of
supported <mode>s)
<mode> Description
0“Drop DTR” ignored but OK response given. ATH
disconnects
1 “Drop DTR” and ATH ignored but OK response given
2“Drop DTR” behavior according to &D setting. ATH
disconnects. Default value
Description Command Possible Responses
Request transmission of
DTMF tone(s)
AT+VTS=<DTMF> OK
ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+VTS=? OK
ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
66
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Note! The AT+VTS command is used only during a voice call.
<DTMF> Description
ASCII
character
string
An ASCII character string with entries in the set 0-9, #, *, A-
D separated by commas. Each entry is interpreted as a
single ASCII character.
Example: The string “8,9” sends two DTMF tones, “8”
followed by “9”
67
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3. Control and Status
3.1 ATQ Result Code Suppression
Determines whether or not the DCE transmits result codes to the DTE.
When result codes are being suppressed, no portion of any intermediate,
final, or unsolicited result code - header, result text, line terminator, or
trailer - is transmitted.
3.2 ATS0 Automatic Answer Control
Defines the automatic answering feature of the modem. A non-zero
value specifies the number of rings before the call is answered.
Note! Call is always answered in the current fax class, regardless of whether
the incoming call is voice, data, or fax.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Result Code
Suppression
ATQ[=]<value> •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATQ? Q: <value>
Show if the command
is supported
ATQ=? Q: (list of supported
<value>s)
<value> Description
0DCE transmits result codes. Default value
1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
Description Command Possible Responses
Automatic answer
control
ATS0=[<rcnt>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS0? <rcnt>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS0=? S0: (list of supported
<rcnt>s)
<rcnt> Description
0Disable automatic answer. Default value
1-7 Answer after the specified number of rings
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
68
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.3 ATS2 Escape Sequence Character
Defines the character to be used as the escape sequence character when
switching from on-line data mode to on-line command mode. The
response to the command is modified to reflect the change.
Note! If the <esc> parameter is set to a value in the range of 128-255, the
escape sequence detection is disabled.
3.4 ATS3 Command Line Termination Character
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character
recognised by the DCE from the DTE to terminate an incoming
command line. It is also generated by the DCE as part of the header,
trailer, and terminator for result codes and information text, along with
the S4 parameter.
The previous value of S3 is used to determine the command line
termination character for entry of the command line containing the S3
setting command. However, the result code issued uses the value of S3
as set during the processing of the command line. For example, if S3
was previously set to 13 and the command line “ATS3=30” is issued,
Description Command Possible Responses
Set escape sequence
character
ATS2=[<esc>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS2 <esc>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS2=? S2: (list of supported
<esc>s)
<esc> Description
43 Escape sequence character. Default value
0 to 255 Escape sequence character
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Command Line
Termination Character
ATS3=<value> •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS3? <value>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS3=? S3: (list of supported
<value>s)
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
69
LZT 123 7468 P1A
the command line is terminated with a <CR> character (IA5 0/13), but
the result code issued uses the character with the ordinal value 30 (IA5
2/14) in place of the <CR>.
3.5 ATS4 Response Formatting Character
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character
generated by the DCE as part of the header, trailer, and terminator for
result codes and information text, along with the S3 parameter (see the
description of the V parameter for usage).
If the value of S4 is changed in a command line, the result code issued
in response to that command line will use the new value of S4.
<value> Description
13 Command line termination character, Default value
0 to 127 Command line termination character
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Response
Formatting Character
ATS4=<value> •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS4? <value>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS4=? S4: (list of supported
<value>s)
<value> Description
10 Formatting character. Default value
Note: ASCII character 10 is equivalent to <LF>
0 to 127 Formatting character
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
70
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.6 ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE)
This S-parameter represents the decimal IA5 value of the character
recognised by the DCE as a request to delete from the command line the
immediately preceding character.
3.7 ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control
Included for compatibility. No functionality
Description Command Possible Responses
Request Command
Line Editing Character
ATS5=<value> •OK
•ERROR
Shows the current
setting
ATS5? <value>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS5=? S5: (list of supported
<value>s)
<value> Description
8Line editing character. Default value
0 to 127 Line editing character
Description Command Possible Responses
Blind dial delay control ATS6=[<dly>] OK
Read the current
setting
ATS6? <dly>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS6=? S6: (list of supported
<dly>s)
<dly> Description
2Wait two seconds before blind dialling. Default value
2-255 Number of seconds to wait before blind dialling
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
71
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.8 ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout
Defines the maximum time allowed between completion of dialling and
the connection being established. If this time is exceeded then the
connection is aborted.
3.9 ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control
Included for compatibility. No functionality
Description Command Possible Responses
Set connection
completion timeout
ATS7=[<tmo>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS7? <tmo>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS7=? S7: (list of supported
<tmo>s)
<tmo> Description
50 Timeout value in seconds. Default value
1-255 Timeout value in seconds
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Comma Dial
Modifier Delay Control
ATS8=[<dly>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting.
ATS8? <dly>
Show if the command
is supported.
ATS8=? S8: (list of supported
<dly>s)
<dly> Description
2The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds. Default value
1-255 The value of the dial modifier delay in seconds
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
72
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.10 ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control
Included for compatibility. No functionality
3.11 AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring
This command activates or deactivates the call monitoring function in
the ME. When this log function is activated in the ME, the ME informs
about call events, such as incoming call, connected, hang up etc.
It is preferable that the current status shall always be sent with result
code *ECAV when activating the log function. The purpose of this is
two fold:
• to gather relevant information for the call log in a TE;
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Automatic
Disconnect Delay
Control
ATS10=[<val>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATS10? <val>
Show if the command
is supported
ATS10=? S10: (list of supported
<val>s)
<val> Description
2Remains connected for two tenths of a second. Default value
1-254 Number of tenths of a second of delay
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Call Monitoring on
or off
AT*ECAM=<onoff> •OK
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current status
for Call Monitoring
AT*ECAM? • *ECAM: <onoff>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*ECAM=? • *ECAM: list of
supported <onoff>s
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
73
LZT 123 7468 P1A
• to make it possible for the TE to display call state information for an
ongoing call.
Examples
AT*ECAM?
*ECAM: 0
AT*ECAM=1
OK
3.12 AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time
This command sets the daylight saving time hours.
Note! This command affects the MS clock set with the AT+CCLK command.
To avoid confusion it is recommended the daylight saving time (DST)
is set with this command before setting the actual local time with
AT+CCLK.
<onoff> Description
0The call log function is disabled (off). Default value
1 The call log function is enabled (on)
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Daylight Saving
Time
AT*EDST=<dst> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read current Daylight
Saving Time
AT*EDST? • *EDST: <dst>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT*EDST=? • *EDST: (list of
supported <dst>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<dst> Description
0Standard time
1 Daylight saving time, +1 hour
2Daylight saving time, +2 hours
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
74
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.13 AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset
This command requests the MS to reset user data. The user data in the
MS will be reset to the default values. This command also unlocks the
MS.
3.14 AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event
The command requests the MS to report when the PIN code has been
inserted and accepted.
Description Command Possible Responses
Perform a master reset
in the MS
AT*EMAR=<phone lock
code>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Shows if the command
is supported or not
AT*EMAR=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<phone lock code> Description
String Security code (phone lock code) must be verified
before performing the master reset, see also
AT+CLCK
Description Command Possible Responses
Requests the MS to
inform when the PIN
code has been
inserted
AT*EPEE=<onoff> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*EPEE=? • *EPEE: (list of
supported <onoff>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current status
for PIN Code Request
AT*EPEE? • *EPEE: <onoff>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<onoff> Description
0Request for report on inserted PIN code is not activated
(off). Default value
1 Request for report on inserted PIN code is activated (on)
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
75
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.15 AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date
Sets the real time clock of the ME. If setting fails in an ME, error +CME
ERROR: <err> is returned. Read command returns the current setting
of the clock.
3.16 AT+CEER Extended Error Report
Causes the TA to return one or more lines of information text <report>.
Typically, the text will consist of a single line containing the failure
information given by the GSM network in text format.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set the real time clock
of the ME
AT+CCLK=<time> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CCLK? • +CCLK: <time>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CCLK=? •OK
•ERROR
<time> Description
string type
value
Format is “yy/mm/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes,
seconds and time zone (indicates the difference,
expressed in quarters of an hour, between the local time
and GMT; range -47...+48), e.g. 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00
GMT+2 hours reads “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
NOTE: If the ME does not support time zone information
then the three last characters of <time> are not returned
by +CCLK?
Description Command Possible Responses
Request an Extended
Error Report
AT+CEER • +CEER: <report>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CEER=? • OK
•ERROR
<report> Description
characters The total number of characters, including line terminators,
in the information text shall not exceed 2041 characters.
Text shall not contain the sequence 0<CR> or OK<CR>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
76
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.17 AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality
Selects the level of functionality <fun> in the MS.
"Full functionality" results in the highest level of power usage. It is
possible to activate all parts of the modem. Default ON state.
"Minimum functionality" results in minimum power usage. The modem
is in a powered OFF state. No functionality can be executed until the
modem is powered back ON.
Transitions between states are defined below.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set MS functionality AT+CFUN=<fun> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
Show the current
setting
AT+CFUN? • +CFUN: <fun>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CFUN=? • +CFUN: (list of
supported <fun>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Initial State New State Function
<fun> = 0 -Modem is off. No functionality
<fun> = 1 <fun> = 0 Modem was fully active. Active calls are hung
up and an IMSI detach is sent. The modem then
powers off
<fun> Description
0Minimum functionality. Modem is OFF
1 Full functionality. Modem is ON
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
77
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.18 AT+CIND Indicator Control
Used to set the values of ME indicators. <ind> value 0 means that the
indicator is off (or in state which can be identified as “off” state), 1
means that indicator is on (or in a state which is more substantial than
“off” state), 2 is more substantial than 1, and so on. If the indicator is a
simple on/off style element, it has values 0 and 1. The number of
elements is ME specific. If the ME does not allow setting of indicators
or it is not currently reachable, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. If a
certain indicator is not writable, it cannot be set. If the parameter is an
empty field, the indicator will keep the previous value.
Test command returns pairs, where string value <descr> is a maximum
16 character description of the indicator and compound value is the
allowed values for the indicator. If ME is not currently reachable,
+CME ERROR: <err> is returned (refer to GSM 07.07).
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Indicator
Control
AT+CIND=[<ind>
[,<ind>[,…]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+CIND? • +CIND: <ind>,<ind>,…
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CIND=? • +CIND: (<descr>,(list of
supported <ind>s)),
(<descr>,(list of supported
<ind>s)),…
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<ind> Description
Integer type Value shall be in range of corresponding <descr>
<descr> Description
“signal” Signal quality (0-5)
“service” Service availability (0-1)
“sounder” Sounder activity (0-1)
“message” Message received (0-1)
“call” Call in progress (0-1)
“roam” Roaming indicator (0-1)
“sms full” A short message memory storage in the MT has become full
(1), or memory locations are available (0); i.e. the range is
(0-1)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
78
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.19 AT+CLAC List all available AT Commands
Causes the ME to return one or more lines of AT commands. This
command has the same functionality as AT*.
Note! This command only returns the AT commands that are available to the
user.
3.20 AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error
Disables or enables the use of result code +CME ERROR: <err> as an
indication of an error relating to the functionality of the ME. When
enabled, ME related errors cause +CME ERROR: <err> final result
code instead of the regular ERROR final result code. ERROR is
returned normally when error is related to syntax, invalid parameters, or
TA functionality. For more information, refer to “+CME ERROR
(Mobile Equipment Error Code)”, page 55.
Command Possible Responses
+CLAC <AT Command1> [<CR> <LF> <AT Command2>[…]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CLAC=? +CME ERROR: <err>
Description Command Possible Responses
Request GSM Mobile
Equipment Error
Control
AT+CMEE=[<n>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the command AT+CMEE? • +CMEE: <n>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMEE=? • +CMEE: (list of
supported <n>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<n> Description
0Disable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use ERROR
instead. Default value
1 Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use numeric
<err> values (see page 55)
2Enable +CME ERROR: <err> result code and use verbose
<err> values (see page 55)
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
79
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.21 AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes from ME to
TE in the case of key pressings, display changes, and indicator state
changes. <mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes
specified within this command. <bfr> controls the effect on buffered
codes when <mode> 1, 2 or 3 is entered. If the ME does not support
setting, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set phone
activity status
AT+CMER=[<mode>
[,<ind>[,<bfr>]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the
current setting
AT+CMER? • +CMER: <mode>,<ind>,<bfr>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CMER=? • +CMER: (list of supported
<mode>s), (list of supported
<ind>s), (list of supported
<bfr>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA; if TA result code
buffer is full, codes can be buffered in some other place
or the oldest ones can be discarded
3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE
link specific inband technique used to embed result
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<ind> Description
0No indicator event reporting
1 Indicator event reporting using result code +CIEV:
<ind>,<value>. <ind> indicates the indicator order number
(as specified for +CIND) and <value> is the new value of
indicator. Only those indicator events, which are not
caused by +CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE
<bfr> Description
0TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this
command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
80
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.22 AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status
Returns the activity status <pas> of the ME. It can be used to interrogate
the ME before requesting action from the phone.
When the command is executed without the <mode> argument, the
command returns <pas>-values from 0 to 128 (for supported values se
table 1 below). When, on the other hand, the command is executed with
the <mode> argument set to 1, the command may return Ericsson
specific <pas> values from 129 to 255 (for supported values see the
table below).
Test command returns values supported by the ME as a compound
value: refer to GSM 07.07.
Description Command Possible Responses
Execute Phone Activity
Status
AT+CPAS[=<mode>] •+CPAS: <pas>
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CPAS=? • +CPAS:
(list of supported
<pas>s)
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<pas> Description
0Ready (ME allows commands from TA/TE)
3 Ringing (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but the
ringer is active)
4Call in progress (ME is ready for commands from TA/TE, but
a call is in progress)
129 In idle state, (operator name/clock/date). This state is a
sub-state to ‘ready’ (0) and has the following definition:
In Idle state, that is, operator, clock and date (is set)
shown on the display
No conversation or data call in progress
No sub-menus shown on the display
4 Only digits, clear, *, NO and # allowed in this mode, not
changing mode
130 Mobile oriented call in progress. This is a sub-state to ‘call
in progress’
131 Mobile terminated call in progress. This is a sub-state to
‘call in progress’
<mode> Description
1Allows the CPAS to return Ericsson specific <pas> values,
such as 129, 130 and 131
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
81
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.23 AT+CPIN PIN Control
Sends the password to the ME, which is necessary to make the ME
operational (SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM). If the PIN is to be entered
twice, the TA autonomously repeats the PIN. If no PIN request is
pending, no action is taken towards the ME and an error message
(+CME ERROR <err>) is returned to the TE.
If the PIN required is PUK, the second pin is required. This second PIN,
<newpin>, is used to replace the old PIN in the SIM.
Note! Commands which interact with the ME that are accepted when the ME
has a pending request for SIM PIN, SIM PUK or PH-SIM are: +CGMI,
+CGMM, +CGMR, +CGSN, +CFUN, +CMEE +CPIN, L and M.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request PIN Control AT+CPIN=<pin>[,<new
pin>]
• +CME ERROR:
<err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CPIN? • +CPIN: <code>
• +CME ERROR:
<err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CPIN=? • +CME ERROR:
<err>
•+CPIN: (supported
<code>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<pin>,<newpin> Description
string The range for the SIM PIN and the PH- SIM PIN is 4 - 8
digits. The SIM PUK consists of 8 digits
<code> Description
READY ME is not pending for any password
SIM PIN ME is waiting SIM PIN to be given
SIM PUK ME is waiting SIM PUK to be given
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
82
LZT 123 7468 P1A
PH-SIM PIN ME is waiting PHone-to-SIM card password to be given
SIM PIN2 ME is waiting SIM PIN2 to be given. This <code> is
recommended to be returned only when the last
executed command resulted in PIN2 authentication
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR: 17); if PIN2 is not entered
correctly after the failure, it is recommended that ME does
not block its operation
SIM PUK2 ME is waiting SIM PUK2 to be given. This <code> is
recommended to be returned only when the last
executed command resulted in PUK2 authentication
failure (i.e. +CME ERROR:18); if PUK2 and new PIN2 are not
entered correctly after the failure, it is recommended that
ME does not block its operation.
BLOCKED The SIM cards is blocked for the user
<err> Description
0Phone failure
5 PH-SIM PIN required
10 SIM not inserted
11 SIM PIN required
12 SIM PUK required
13 SIM failure
14 SIM busy
15 SIM wrong
16 Incorrect password
24 Text string too long
25 Invalid characters in text string
100 Unknown
<code> Description
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
83
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.24 AT+CPWD Change Password
Sets a new password for the facility lock function defined by command
Facility Lock +CLCK.
Test command returns a list of pairs which present the available
facilities and the maximum length of their password.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request facility lock AT+CPWD=<fac>,
<oldpwd>,
<newpwd>
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CPWD=? • +CPWD:
(<fac1>,<pwdlength1>),
(<fac2>,<pwdlength2>),
…
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<fac> Description
“PS” PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when
other than current SIM card inserted)
“SC” SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up
and when this lock command issued)
“P2” SIM PIN2
“AO” BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)
“OI” BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls) (refer GSM 02.88
clause 1)
“AI” BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)
“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the
home country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 2)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing International Calls except to
Home Country) (refer GSM 02.88 clause 1)
“AB” All Barring services (refer GSM 02.30)
“AG” All outGoing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)
“AC” All inComing barring services (refer GSM 02.30)
<oldpwd> Description
string type <oldpwd> shall be the same as password specified for the
facility from the ME user interface or with the change
password command, +CPWD
<newpwd> Description
string type <newpwd> is the new password, maximum length of
password can be determined with <pwdlength>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
84
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<pwdlength> Description
Integer type Maximum length of the password for the facility
<err> Description
0Phone failure
3 Operation not allowed
5PH-SIM PIN required
10 SIM not inserted
11 SIM PIN required
12 SIM PUK required
13 SIM failure
14 SIM busy
15 SIM wrong
16 Incorrect password
17 SIM PIN2 required
18 SIM PUK2 required
23 Text string too long
24 Invalid characters in text string
100 Unknown
101..255 Reserved by ETS
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
85
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.25 AT+CR Service Reporting Control
Enables or disables display of intermediate bearer capability reports
during the handshake phase.
Intermediate Result Codes:
+CR: <serv>
3.26 AT+CRC Cellular Result Code
Command controls whether or not;
• the extended format of incoming call indication;
• or GPRS network request for PDP context activation;
• or notification for VBS/VGCS calls is used.
When enabled, an incoming call is indicated to the TE with unsolicited
result code +CRING: <type> instead of the normal RING.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Service Reporting
Control
AT+CR=<mode> •OK
•ERROR
Read current setting AT+CR? • +CR: <mode>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CR=? • +CR: (list of
supported
<mode>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Disable reporting. Default value
1 Enable reporting
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Cellular Result
Code option
AT+CRC=[<mode>] •OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CRC? • +CRC: <mode>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CRC=? • +CRC: (list of
supported
<mode>s)
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
86
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
+CRING: <type>
3.27 AT+CSAS Save Settings
Saves active message service settings to a non-volatile memory. A TA
can contain several settings profiles. Settings specified in commands
Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message Parameters +CSMP and
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB (if implemented) are
saved. Certain settings may not be supported by the storage (e.g. SIM
SMS parameters) and therefore can not be saved.
Test command shall display the supported profile numbers for reading
and writing of settings.
<mode> Description
0Disables extended format
1 Enables extended format
Description Command Possible Responses
Save Settings AT+CSAS[=<profile>] • +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Get available
profiles
AT+CSAS=? • +CSAS: (list of supported
<profile>s)
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<profile> Description
0..255 Manufacturer specific profile number where settings are
to be stored. Default value is 0
3. CONTROL AND STATUS
87
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.28 AT+CSQ Signal Strength
Returns the received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit
error rate <ber> from the ME. Test command returns values supported
by the TA as compound values.
Description Command Possible Responses
Execute Signal
Strength
AT+CSQ • +CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CSQ=? • +CSQ: (list of
supported
<rssi>s),(list of
supported <ber>s)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<rssi> Description
0–113dBm or less
1 –111dBm
2..30 –109… –53dBm
31 –51dBm or greater
99 Not known or not detectable
<ber> Description
0..7 As RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08 subclause
8.2.4
99 Not known or not detectable
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
88
LZT 123 7468 P1A
3.29 AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update
Enables and disables the automatic time zone update via NITZ. If
setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Enable and disable
automatic time zone
update via NITZ
AT+CTZU=<onoff> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read current setting AT+CTZU? • +CTZU: <onoff>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CTZU=? • +CTZU: (list of
supported <onoff>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<onoff> Description
0The automatic time zone update is disabled (off). Default
value
1 The automatic time zone update is enabled (on)
89
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4. Audio
AT*E2EAMS and AT*E2APR are new commands that replace the
funtionality offered by the *EALR, *EAMS, *EARS and *ELAM
commands. Use the new commands in new applications. The old
commands are included for compatibility.
4.1 AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification
This command allows the modification and configuration of the current
audio profile. An audio profile is a set of data which uniquely defines
the way in which the audio paths, gains, DSP algorithms and switch
setting are configured. There are several audio profiles available in
non-volatile storage, and the current profile can be modified by use of
the AT*E2APR command.
The AT*E2EAMS command allows the user to:
Description Command Possible Responses
Request
operation
with audio
profile
AT*E2EAMS= <op>[,<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>,<SideToneGain>,
<AuxInGain>,<MicInGain>,
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>,<MicPath>,
<SpkPath>,<TxPCM>,
<RxPCM>,<HFAlgorithm>,
<LocalAudio>,<TxGainLow>,
<MicVolt2V>,<SideTone>,
<NoiseRed>,<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>,][,<val>]]
• ERROR
•OK
Display set
profile
AT*E2EAMS? • *E2EAMS: <TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>,
<SideToneGain>,
<AuxInGain>,
<MicInGain>,
<TxAGC>,<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>,
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,
<HFAlgorithm>,
<LocalAudio>,
<TxGainLow>,
<MicVolt2V>,
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>
OK
• ERROR
Show if the
command
is supported
AT*E2EAMS=? • *E2EAMS:
(list of supported <op>s)
• ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
90
LZT 123 7468 P1A
• configure the whole profile, specifying each audio parameter in a
comma separated list;
• set a single parameter, given by its parameter number;
• save the current profile to non-volatile memory under the current
profile number (see AT*E2APR).
The current audio settings can also be displayed by running the read
command AT*E2EAMS?
Default audio settings are given in AT*E2APR.
Abortability:
This command may not be aborted.
Refer to the diagram below to understand which parts of the audio
circuit are affected by the various parameters.
Figure 4.1 Audio diagram of the CODEC
AuxInGain
MicInGain
SideTone
Gain
Aux Amp
Ear Amp
TxPGA TxGainLow
RxPGA Volume
TxPCM
RxPCM
Speech
decoder
F/R
EchoCancel
Handsfree
NoiseRed
Encoder
F/R
ATMS
MICP
MICN
BEARP
BEARN
PCMOUT
PCMIN
PCMULD
PCMDLD
DSPCODEC
SideTone
switch
MicPath
switches
SpkPath
switches
4. AUDIO
91
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<op> Description
0Configure current profile (<pr1> to <pr21>)
1Set <TxPGA>
2 Set <RxPGA>
3Set <SideToneGain>
4Set <AuxInGain>
5 Set <MicInGain>
6 Set <TxAGC>
7 Set <Volume>
8Set <MaxVolume>
9Set <MicPath>
10 Set <SpkPath>
11 Set <TxPCM>
12 Set <RxPCM>
13 Set <HFAlgorithm>
14 Set <LocalAudio>
15 Set <TxGainLow>
16 Set <MicVolt2V>
17 Set <SideTone>
18 Set <NoiseRed>
19 Set <EchoCancel>
20 Set <AnalogRing>
255 Save current profile to non-volatile storage at current
profile number
<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>
Description
0-5dB PGA gain
1 -2.5dB PGA gain
20dB PGA gain
3 2.5dB PGA gain
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
92
LZT 123 7468 P1A
45dB PGA gain
57.5dB PGA gain
6–7.5dB PGA gain
7–10dB PGA gain
<SideToneGain> Description
010dB
113dB
216dB
319dB
422dB
525dB
<AuxInputGain> Description
0MUTE
113dB
234dB
346dB
<MicInputGain> Description
0MUTE
113dB
225dB
334dB
446dB
<TxAGCGain> Description
00dB
13dB
26dB
<TxPGA>,
<RxPGA>
Description
4. AUDIO
93
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<Volume>,
<MaxVolume>
Description
0MUTE
1-9 Volume levels 1-9
<MicPath>,
<SpkPath>
Description
0OFF
1 MUTE
2Internal (using microphone/speaker)
3 External (using ATMS/AFMS)
<TxPCM>,
<RxPCM>
Description
013bit PCM
116bit PCM
<HFAlgorithm> Description
0No handsfree
1 Advanced handsfree
2Switching handsfree
3 No handsfree handheld
4No handsfree external
<LocalAudio> Description
0Local audio mode off
1 Local audio microphone/no speaker
2Local audio no microphone/speaker
3 Local audio microphone/speaker
<TxGainLow> Description
0Tx gain normal
1 Tx gain –7dB
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
94
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Examples
AT*E2EAMS=?
*E2EAMS=(0-21,255)
OK
Current default profile is 0:
AT*E2EAMS?
*E2EAMS: 2,2,3,2,3,2,5,9,3,3,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1
OK
Sets current profile with these settings:
AT*E2EAMS=0,2,1,2,0,0,2,5,9,2,2,0,1,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1
OK
Sets TxPGA gain to 0dB:
AT*E2EAMS=1,2
OK
Turns analog ringing off:
AT*E2EAMS=20,0
OK
Save current profile to currently loaded profile in non-volatile memory:
AT*E2EAMS=255
OK
<MicVolt2V> Description
0Microphone voltage at 2.5V
1 Microphone voltage at 2V
<SideTone>,
<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,
<AnalogRing>
Description
0OFF
1ON
4. AUDIO
95
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.2 AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation
This command allows the maniuplation and storage of the audio
“profiles” stored in the MS. The requirement for the 2nd and 3rd
parameters depend on the operation being carried out.
Using the command you can:
• Set one of the three audio profiles 0, 1 or 2 as the current profile.
This will load the profile's settings from NVM and implement them.
• Read one of the audio profiles. The current settings for the profile
number defined will be displayed.
• Copy all parameters from one profile into another.
• Reset any of the profiles. This will reinstate the factory defaults for
the profile:
- 0 is the handset profile,
- 1 is the portable handsfree profile,
- 2 is the car kit profile.
• Set a profile as the default profile on next power up.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request operation
with audio profile
AT*E2APR=
<op>[,<prnum1>
[,<prnum2>]]
•ERROR
•OK
• *E2APR: <TxPGA>,<RxPGA>,
<SideToneGain>,<AuxInGain>,
<MicInGain>,<TxAGC>,
<Volume>,<MaxVolume>,
<MicPath>,<SpkPath>,
<TxPCM>,<RxPCM>,
<HFAlgorithm>,<LocalAudio>,
<TxGainLow>,<MicVolt2V>,
<SideTone>,<NoiseRed>,
<EchoCancel>,<AnalogRing>
•OK
Display currently
set profile
AT*E2APR? • *E2APR: current <prnum>
• ERROR
Shows if the
command is
supported
AT*E2APR=? • *E2APR: (list of supported
<op>s), (list of supported
<prnum1>s), (list of supported
<prnum2>s)
•ERROR
<op> Description
0Set profile <prnum1> to set as current
1 Copy profile <prnum1> to <prnum2>
2Read profile <prnum1> settings
3 Reset profile <prnum1> to factory default
4Set default profile as <prnum1>. Will store this as defautl
profile in NVM, and use it as default from next power on
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
96
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Examples
AT*E2APR=?
*E2APR= (0-4),(0-2),(0-2)
OK
Current default profile is profile 0:
AT*E2APR?
*E2APR: 0
OK
Set audio profile now used to profile 1:
AT*E2APR=0,1
OK
Audio profile 1 settings:
AT*E2APR=1,1
*E2APR: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
OK
Copy audio profile 1 to audio profile 2:
AT*E2APR=2,1,2
OK
Reset audio profile 1 with factory default - this also resets the current
audio paths to the new profile as 1 is currently used:
AT*E2APR=3,1
OK
Sets profile number 1 as the default when modem is powered on:
AT*E2APR=4,1
OK
<prnum1>,
<prnum2>
Description
0Profile 0 (Factory profile set for handset). Default value
1 Profile 1 (Factory profile set for portable handsfree)
2Profile 2 (Factory profile set for car kit)
4. AUDIO
97
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.3 AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request the audio lines
(ATMS,AFMS)
AT*EALR=<mode>
[,<activation>
[,<aud_status>]]
• *EALR: <mode>,
<activation>,<resp>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT*EALR? *EALR:
<mode>,<activation>,
<resp>
Show list of supported
parameters
AT*EALR=? *EALR:(list of supported
<mode>s,
<activation>s and
<aud_status>s
parameters)
<mode> Description
0No request for ATMS or AFMS
1 Request ATMS and not AFMS
2Request AFMS and not ATMS
3 Request ATMS and AFMS
<activation> Description
0Not direct activated audio accessory (e.g. cordless
portable hands free)
1 Direct activated audio accessory (e.g. vehicle hands
free)
<aud_status> Description
0No change of the audio status
1 Audio hand over. Accessory hands over control of both
the audio lines and the call to the phone
2Audio demand. Accessory demands control of both the
audio lines and the call
<resp> Description
0Disable ATMS and AFMS
1 Enable ATMS and disable AFMS
2Disable ATMS and enable AFMS
3 Enable ATMS and AFMS
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
98
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.4 AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
Description Command Possible Responses
Sets the audio
mode for the
application
AT*EAMS=<internal_voice_al
g>[,<noise_reduction>
[,<side tone>
[,<short_echo_canceling>
[,<ATMS_gain>
[,<class>
[,<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation
_from_class>
[,<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation
_from_class>]]]]]]]
•OK
•ERROR
Show the
current audio
mode setting
AT*EAMS? *EAMS:<internal_voice_alg
>, <noise_reduction>,
<side_tone>,
<short_echo_canceling>,
<AFMS_gain>,<class>,<AT
MS_sensitivity_deviation_fr
om_class>,<AFMS_sensitivi
ty_deviation_from_class>
Show list of
supported
services
AT*EAMS=? *EAMS: (list of supported
<internal_voice_alg >s,
<noise_reduction>s,
<side_tone>s,
<short_echo_canceling>s,
<AFMS_gain>s>,
<class>s,
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviatio
n_from_class>s,
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviatio
n_from_class>s)
<internal_voice_alg> Description
0None
1 Semi Duplex
2Full Duplex
(Note! the internal hands free algorithm in the
MS contains echo cancelling)
<noise_reduction> Description
0Off
1On
<side_tone> Description
0Off
1On
4. AUDIO
99
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.5 AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
<short_echo_canceling> Description
0Off
1On
<ATMS_gain> Description
0Normal (0dB) (internal voice processing)
<Class> Description
0None
1 Low end, class reference Hector
2Mid End, class reference Scott
3 High End, class reference Hasse
<ATMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>,
<AFMS_sensitivity_deviation_from_class>
Description
00dB
12,5dB
2–2,5dB
35,0dB
4–5,0dB
Description Command Possible Responses
Request analogue ring
signal in the loudspeaker
AT*EARS=<mode> •OK
•ERROR
Show the current mode
setting
AT*EARS? *EARS: <mode>
Show list of supported
modes
AT*EARS=? *EARS: (list of
supported <mode>s)
<mode> Description
0Disable analogue ring signal
1 Enable analogue ring signal
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
100
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.6 AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
4.7 AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set local audio mode AT*ELAM=<mic>
[,<loudspeaker>]
• *ELAM: <mic>,
<loudspeaker>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
service setting
AT*ELAM? *ELAM:
<mic>,<loudspeaker>
Show list of supported
parameters
AT*ELAM=? *ELAM: (list of
supported <mic>s and
<loudspeaker>s
parameters)
<mic> Description
0Off
1Microphone analogue
<loudspeaker> Description
0Off
1 Loudspeaker analogue
Description Command Possible Responses
Enables/disables the
phone microphone
AT*EMIC=<mode> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported, show
supported values
AT*EMIC=? • *EMIC: (list of
supported
<mode>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
settings
AT*EMIC? • *EMIC: <mode>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Microphone is disabled (off)
1 Microphone is enabled (on)
4. AUDIO
101
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4.8 AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request
Included for compatibility. No functionality.
4.9 AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control
Used to set or query whether an external accessory such as the vehicle
handsfree controls the audio volume.
By default, the <external volume> is turned off, i.e. the volume over
AFMS is controlled by the phone MMI.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request for mute
indications
AT*EMIR=<mode> •OK
•ERROR
Show supported
message types along
with the current service
setting
AT*EMIR? *EMIR: <mode>,<resp>
Show list of supported
services
AT*EMIR=? *EMIR: (list of supported
<mode>s)
<mode> Description
0Off, music mute indication result codes will not be sent to
the accessory
1 On, music mute indication result codes will be sent to the
accessory
<resp> Description
0Music mute inactive
1 Music mute active
Description Command Possible Responses
Sets the maximum
volume level on the
audio lines
AT*EXVC=<external
volume>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and show
the possible report
settings
AT*EXVC=? • *EXVC: (list of
supported <external
volume>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT*EXVC? •*EXVC: <external
volume>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
102
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The set command is effective only as long as the phone senses that it is
connected to an external accessory that has issued the command. Once
the phone and the accessory are disconnected the <external volume>
setting returns to default.
<external volume> Description
0The phone MMI controls audio volume over AFMS
1 Audio volume over AFMS is output at maximum level
that is no clipping occurs. An external accessory
such as a vehicle kit controls the actual volume level
heard by the user
103
LZT 123 7468 P1A
5. Data - CSD/HSCSD
Note! Since the modem does not support V42bis compression the following
commands have not been implemented:
•AT+DS
•AT+DR
5.1 AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type
Selects the bearer service <name> with data rate <speed>, and the
connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated.
Values may also be used during mobile terminated data call setup,
especially in the case of single numbering scheme calls.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as compound values.
Description Command Possible Responses
Select bearer service
type
AT+CBST=[<speed>,
[<name>,[<ce>]]]
•OK
•ERROR
Read the command AT+CBST? • +CBST:
<speed>,<name>,
<ce>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CBST=? • +CBST: (list of supported
<speed>s,list of
supported <name>s, list
of supported <ce>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<speed> Description
0Auto selection of baud rate
4 2400bps V.22bis
64800bps V.32
7 9600bps V.32
12 9600bps V.34
15 19200bps V.34
68 2400bps V.110 (ISDN)
70 4800bps V.110 (ISDN)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
104
LZT 123 7468 P1A
71 9600bps V.110 (ISDN)
75 14400bps V.110 (ISDN)
79 19200bps V.110 (ISDN)
80 28800bps V.110 (ISDN)
81 38400bps V.110 (ISDN)
82 48000bps V.110 (ISDN)
83 56000bps V.110 (ISDN)
<name> Description
0 Asynchronous connection (UDI or 3.1kHz modem)
<ce> Description
1Non transparent
<speed> Description
5. DATA - CSD/HSCSD
105
LZT 123 7468 P1A
5.2 AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol
Radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data
calls are originated may be altered with this command. Available
command subparameters depend on the RLP versions implemented by
the device (e.g. <ver> may not be available if device supports only
versions 0 and 1).
Read command returns current settings for each supported RLP version
<verx>. Only RLP parameters applicable to the corresponding <verx>
are returned.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value. If ME/TA supports several RLP versions <verx>, the RLP
parameter value ranges for each <verx> are returned in a separate line.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set radio link
protocol
AT+CRLP=[<iws>
[,<mws>[,<T1>
[,<N2>[,<ver>
[, <T4>]]]]]]
•OK
•ERROR
Read the
command
AT+CRLP? • +CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver1>
[,<T4>]][<CR><LF>
•+CRLP:
<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<ver2>
[,<T4>]][...]]
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CRLP=? • +CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s),
(list of supported <mws>s),
(list of supported <T1>s),
(list of supported<N2>s)[,<ver1>
[,(list of supported <T4>s)]]
[<CR><LF>+CRLP: (list of
supported <iws>s), (list of
supported <mws>s), (list of
supported <T1>s), (list of
supported <N2>s)[,<ver2>[,(list of
supported <T4>s)]][...]]
•OK
•ERROR
<iws> Description
120
0 - 496
IWF to MS window size
<mws> Description
120
0 - 496
MS to IWF window size
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
106
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<T1> Description
48
38 - 100
Acknowledgment timer T1 (*10ms)
<N2> Description
6
0 - 255
Re-transmission attempts N2
<T4> Description
5
3 - 255
Re-sequencing period T4 (*10ms)
<ver> Description
Integer RLP version. When version indication is not present,
<ver>=0 is assumed
107
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6. Data - GPRS
6.1 AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate
Used to activate or deactivate the specified PDP context(s).
After the command has completed, the MS remains in V.250 command
state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the command is ignored
and OK is returned. If the requested state cannot be achieved, ERROR
or +CME: ERROR is returned. If the MS is not attached to the GPRS
service when the activation form of the command is executed, the MS
first performs a GPRS attach and then attempts to activate the specific
contexts.
If no <cid>s are specified the activation form of the command activates
all defined contexts.
If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command
deactivates all active contexts.
Description Command Possible Responses
Activate or deactivate
the specified PDP
context(s)
+CGACT=[<state>
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the command +CGACT? • +CGACT: <cid>,
<state>[<CR><LF>
+CGACT: <cid>,
<state>[...]]
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
+CGACT=? • +CGACT: (list of
supported <state>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<state> Description
0PDP context activation deactivated
1 PDP context activation activated
<cid> Description
Integer type A numeric parameter which specifies a specific PDP
context definition
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
108
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.2 AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach
Used to attach the MS to, or detach the MS from, the GPRS/packet
domain service. After the command has completed, the MS remains in
V.250 command state. If the MS is already in the requested state, the
command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the requested
state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is
returned. Extended error responses (enabled by the +CMEE command)
are listed under “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”,
page 55.
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the
attachment state changes to detached.
Note! This command has the characteristics of both the V.250 action and
parameter commands. Hence it has the read form in addition to the
execution/set and test forms.
Description Command Possible Responses
Attach or detach MS
to the GPRS/packet
domain/packet
domain service
+CGATT=[<state>] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the command +CGATT? • +CGATT: <state>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
+CGATT=? • +CGATT: (list of
supported <state>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<state> Description
0Detached
1 Attached
6. DATA - GPRS
109
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.3 AT+CGDATA Enter Data State
Causes the MS to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish
communication between the TE and the network using one or more
GPRS/packet domain PDP types. This may include performing a
GPRS/packet domain attach and one or more PDP context activations.
Description Command Possible Responses
Establish GPRS/packet
domain connection
+CGDATA=[<L2p>,[cid
[,cid>[,…]]]]
•CONNECT
•ERROR
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
+CGDATA=? • +CGDATA: (list of
supported <L2P>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<L2P> Description
PPP Point-to-point protocol for a PDP such as IP
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
110
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.4 AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context
Specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by
the (local) context identification parameter, <cid>.
Description Command Possible Responses
Select PDP
context
parameters
+CGDCONT=[<cid>
[,<PDP_type> [,<APN>
[,<PDP_addr>
[,<d_comp>
[,<h_comp> [,<pd1>
[,…[,pdN]]]]]]]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the
command
+CGDCONT? • +CGDCONT: <cid>,
<PDP_type>,<APN>,
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
<cid>, <PDP_type>,<APN>,
<PDP_addr>,<d_comp>,
<h_comp>[,<pd1>[,…[,pdN]]]
[...]]
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
+CGDCONT=? • +CGDCONT: (range of
supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of
supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[,(list of supported <pd1>s)
[,…[,(list of supported
<pdN>s)]]]
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT:
(range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of
supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[,(list of supported
<pd1>s)[,…[,(list of supported
<pdN>s)]]] [...]]
•OK
•ERROR
<cid> Description
Integer type (PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter which
specifies a particular PDP context definition. The
parameter is local to the TE-MS interface and is used in
other PDP context-related commands. The range of
permitted values (minimum value = 1) is returned by the
test form of the command
1-10 Supported values. Ericsson specific
<PDP_type> Description
IP Internet Protocol (IETF STD 5)
6. DATA - GPRS
111
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<APN> Description
String type (Access Point Name) a string parameter which is a logical
name that is used to select the GGSN or the external
packet data network. If the value is null or omitted, then
the subscription value will be requested
<PDP_address> Description
String type A string parameter that identifies the MS in the
address space applicable to the PDP. If the value is
null or omitted, then a value may be provided by
the TE during the PDP startup procedure or, failing
that, a dynamic address will be requested
<d_comp> Description
0PDP data compression OFF
1 PDP data compression ON
2..255 Reserved
<h_comp> Description
0PDP header compression OFF
1 PDP header compression ON
2..255 Reserved
<pdN> Description
String type Zero to N string parameters whose meanings are specific
to the <PDP_type>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
112
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.5 AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting
Enables or disables the sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV:
XXX from MS to TE in the case of certain events occurring in the
GPRS/packet domain MS or the network.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set command +CGEREP=[<mode>
[,<bfr>]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the command +CGEREP? • +CGEREP:
<mode>,<bfr>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
+CGEREP=? • +CGEREP: (list of
supported
<mode>s),(list of
supported <bfr>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Buffer unsolicited result codes in the MS. No codes are
forwarded to the TE
1 Discard unsolicited result codes when MS-TE link is
reserved; otherwise forward them directly to the TE
<bfr> Description
0MS buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this
command is cleared when <mode> 1 or 2 is entered
6. DATA - GPRS
113
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.6 AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address
Returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers. The
test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
Description Command Possible Responses
Show PDP addresses
for specified CIDs
+CGPADDR=[<cid>
[,<cid> [,…]]]
•+CGPADDR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
[<CR><LF>+CGPAD
DR:
<cid>,<PDP_addr>
[...]]
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
+CGPADDR=? • +CGPADDR: (list of
defined <cid>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<cid> Description
Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition (see +CGDCONT command). If no <cid> is
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are
returned
<PDP_address> Description
String type A string that identifies the MS in the address space
applicable to the PDP. The address may be static or
dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by
the +CGDCONT command when the context was
defined. For a dynamic address it will be the one
assigned during the last PDP context activation that
used the context definition referred to by <cid>.
<PDP_address> is omitted if none is available
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
114
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.7 AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable)
Allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is
checked by the MS against the negotiated profile returned in the
Activate PDP Context Accept message.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same
parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQMIN
command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.
The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may
be set to a separate value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN=<cid> causes the
minimum acceptable profile for context number <cid> to become
undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated profile.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set minimum
acceptable
profile
+CGQMIN=[<cid>
[,<precedence>
[,<delay> [,<reliability>
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the
command
+CGQMIN? • +CGQMIN: <cid>,
<precedence>, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN:
<cid>, <precedence>,
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[…]]
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
+CGQMIN=? • +CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s)
, (list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported
<mean>s)[<CR><LF>+CGQMI
N: <PDP_type>, (list of
supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s)
, (list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported
<mean>s)[…]]
•OK
•ERROR
<cid> Description
Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition
6. DATA - GPRS
115
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<precedence> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1 High priority
2Normal priority
3Low priority
<delay> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1-4 Delay class
<reliability> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1-5 Reliability class
<peak> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1 Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)
2Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)
3 Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)
4Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)
5 Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)
6Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)
7 Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)
8Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)
9 Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)
<mean> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1 Best effort
2100 (~0.22bits/s)
3 200 (~0.44bits/s)
4500 (~1.11bits/s)
5 1000 (~2.2bits/s)
62000 (~4.4bits/s)
7 5000 (~11.1bits/s)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
116
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.8 AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested)
Allows the TE to specify a quality of service profile that is used when
the MS sends an activate PDP context request message to the network.
810000 (~22bits/s)
9 20000 (~44bits/s)
10 50000 (~111bits/s)
11 100000 (~0.22kbits/s)
12 200000 (~0.44kbits/s)
13 500000 (~1.11kbits/s)
14 1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)
15 2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)
16 5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)
17 10000000 (~22kbits/s)
18 20000000 (~44kbits/s)
31 50000000 (~111kbits/s)
<mean> Description
Description Command Possible Responses
Set quality
of service
profile
+CGQREQ=[<cid>
[,<precedence>
[,<delay>
[,<reliability>
[,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the
command
+CGQREQ? • +CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence>,
<delay>, <reliability>, <peak>,
<mean>[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ:
<cid>, <precedence>, <delay>,
<reliability>, <peak>, <mean>[…]]
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command
is supported
+CGQREQ=? • +CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,
(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>,
(list of supported <precedence>s),
(list of supported <delay>s),
(list of supported <reliability>s),
(list of supported <peak>s),
(list of supported <mean>s)[…]]
•OK
•ERROR
6. DATA - GPRS
117
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the
(local) context identification parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same
parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the +CGQREQ
command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command.
The QoS profile consists of a number of parameters, each of which may
be set to a separate value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid> causes the
requested profile for context number <cid> to become undefined.
<cid> Description
Integer type Parameter which specifies a particular PDP context
definition
<precedence> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1 High priority
2Normal priority
3 Low priority
<delay> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1-4 Delay class
<reliability> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1-5 Reliability class
<peak> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1 Up to 1000 (8kbits/s)
2Up to 2000 (16kbits/s)
3 Up to 4000 (32kbits/s)
4Up to 8000 (64kbits/s)
5 Up to 16000 (128kbits/s)
6Up to 32000 (256kbits/s)
7 Up to 64000 (512kbits/s)
8Up to 128000 (1024kbits/s)
9 Up to 256000 (2048kbits/s)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
118
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<mean> Description
0Subscribed (from network) value used
1 Best effort
2100 (~0.22bits/s)
3 200 (~0.44bits/s)
4500 (~1.11bits/s)
5 1000 (~2.2bits/s)
62000 (~4.4bits/s)
7 5000 (~11.1bits/s)
810000 (~22bits/s)
9 20000 (~44bits/s)
10 50000 (~111bits/s)
11 100000 (~0.22kbits/s)
12 200000 (~0.44kbits/s)
13 500000 (~1.11kbits/s)
14 1000000 (~2.2kbits/s)
15 2000000 (~4.4kbits/s)
16 5000000 (~11.1kbits/s)
17 10000000 (~22kbits/s)
18 20000000 (~44kbits/s)
31 50000000 (~111kbits/s)
6. DATA - GPRS
119
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.9 AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
when <n>=1 and there is a change in the GPRS/packet domain network
registration status of the MS, or code +CGREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.
Note! If the GPRS/Packet Domain MS also supports circuit mode services, the
+CGREG command and +CGREG: result code apply to the registration
status and location information for those services.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set command AT+CGREG=[<n>] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
settings
AT+CGREG? • +CGREG:
<n>,<stat>[,<lac>,
<ci>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CGREG=? • +CGREG: (list of
supported <n>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<n> Description
0Disable network registration unsolicited result code
1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code
2Enable network registration and location information
unsolicited result code
<stat> Description
0Not registered, MS is not searching for a new operator to
register with
1 Registered, home network
2Not registered, but MS is searching for a new operator to
register with
3 Registration denied
4Unknown
5 Registered, roaming
<lac> Description
String type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
120
LZT 123 7468 P1A
6.10 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages
Used to specify the service or service preference that the MS will use to
send MO SMS messages. The read command returns the currently
selected service or service preference.
<ci> Description
String type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
Description Command Possible Responses
Set service or service
preference
+CGSMS=[<service>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the command +CGSMS? • +CGSMS: <service>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
+CGSMS=? • +CGSMS: (list of
available
<service>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<services> Description
2GPRS/packet domain preferred (use circuit switched if
GPRS/packet domain not available)
3 Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS/packet domain if
circuit switched not available)
121
LZT 123 7468 P1A
7. Data - HSCSD
7.1 AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters
Returns information about the current HSCSD call parameters, i.e. the
current number of receive and transmit timeslots, air interface user rate
and channel coding.
Description Command Possible Responses
Show current HSCSD
call parameters
AT+CHSC • +CHSC:<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if command is
supported
AT+CHSC=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<rx> Description
0No HSCSD call is active. See also note below
1 The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 1
2The number of receive timeslots currently in use is 2
<tx> Description
0No HSCSD call is active. See also note below
1 The number of transmit timeslots currently in use is 1
<aiur> Description
0No HSCSD call is active. See also note below.
1 Current air interface user rate is 9.6kbits/s
3Current air interface user rate is 19.2kbits/s
<coding> Description
0No HSCSD call is active. See also note
4 Current channel coding is 9.6kbits/s (TCH/F9.6)
8Current channel coding is 14.4kbits/s (TCH/F14.4)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
122
LZT 123 7468 P1A
7.2 AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters
Shows information about HSCSD features supported by the ME/TA.
Description Command Possible Responses
Show HSCSD features
supported by the ME/
TA
AT+CHSD •+CHSD:
<mclass>,<maxRx>,
<maxTx>,<sum>,<codings>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if command is
supported
AT+CHSD=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<mclass> Description
2Multislot class is 2
<maxRx> Description
2Maximum number of receive timeslots that ME can use is 2
<maxTx> Description
1Maximum number of transmit timeslots that ME can use is 1
<sum> Description
3Total number of receive and transmit timeslots that ME
can use at the same time is 3 (i.e. 2+1). The following
applies in a HSCSD call: 2 (receive slots) + (transmit slots)
<sum>
<codings> Description
4Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbits/s only
7. DATA - HSCSD
123
LZT 123 7468 P1A
7.3 AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration
Controls parameters for non-transparent HSCSD calls. Changing
<topRx> or <codings> during a call does not affect the current call.
Changing <wAiur> or <wRx> affects the current call only if <topRx>
was non-zero when the call was established. When using the command
in this way it comes in the “action” command category. This is what is
referred to as user initiated up- and down-grading in GSM 02.34 and
GSM 03.34.
Note! Recommended value for parameter <speed> in AT+CBST is 0.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set HSCSD
configuration. This
command is also used
during a call if new
<wAiur> and/or <wRx>
are/is desired
AT+CHSN=[<wAiur>
[,<wRx>[,<topRx>
[,<codings>]]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show current non-
transparent HSCSD
setting
AT+CHSN? • +CHSN: <wAiur>,
<wRx>, <topRx>,
<codings>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if command is
supported and show
parameter ranges
AT+CHSN=? • +CHSN: (list of
supported <wAiur>s),
(list of supported
<wRx>s), (list of
supported <topRx>s),
(list of supported
<codings>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<wAiur> Description
0TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive
timeslots from currently selected fixed network user rate
(<speed> parameter from +CBST command, and
<codings>, and <wRx> (or <maxRx> from +CHSD
command if <wRx>=0)
1 Wanted air interface user rate is 9.6kbit/s
2Wanted air interface user rate is 14.4kbit/s
3 Wanted air interface user rate is 19.2kbit/s
4Wanted air interface user rate is 28.8kbit/s
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
124
LZT 123 7468 P1A
7.4 AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report
With this command enabled, the intermediate result code +CHSR:
<rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding> is returned (from TA to TE) when an
HSCSD call is being set up. The result code represents the current
(negotiated or renegotiated) HSCSD parameters. If enabled, the
intermediate result code is transmitted at the point of the call setup
negotiation, where the ME/TA has determined what type of HSCSD
connection will be used. Result code transmission is done after possible
service (CR), error control (+ER), and/or compression (+DR) reporting,
<wRx> Description
0TA/ME shall calculate a proper number of receive
timeslots from currently selected <wAiur> and <codings>
See note below
1 Wanted number of receive timeslots is 1
2Wanted number of receive timeslots is 2
<topRx> Description
0Indicates that the user is not going to change <wAiur>
and /or <wRx> during the next call
1 Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 1
2Top value for <wRx> that user is going to request during
the next established non-transparent HSCSD call is 2
<codings> Description
4Indicates that the accepted channel coding for the next
established non-transparent HSCSD call is 9.6kbit/s only
Description Command Possible Responses
Set HSCSD parameters
reporting on or off
AT+CHSR=[<mode>] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show current setting AT+CHSR? • +CHSR: <mode>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if command is
supported and show
parameter range
AT+CHSR=? • +CHSR: (list of
supported
<modes>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
7. DATA - HSCSD
125
LZT 123 7468 P1A
but before possible TE-TA rate (+ILRR) reporting and before the
intermediate result code CONNECT is transmitted. The format of the
intermediate result code is:
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>
For the value definitions, refer to “AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call
Parameters”, page 121. For instance, for a non-transparent HSCSD call,
result code ‘CHSR: 2, 1, 4, 8’ means that the call has two timeslots
downlink, one timeslot uplink, the air interface user rate is 28.8 kbits/s
and the used channel coding is
TCH/F14.4.
Itermediate Result Codes:
+CHSR: <rx>,<tx>,<aiur>,<coding>
7.5 AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading
Enables or disables the HSCSD automatic user-initiated upgrade.
<mode> Description
0Disable reporting
1 Enable reporting
Description Command Possible Responses
Set HSCSD automatic
user initiated
upgrading on or off
AT+CHSU=[<mode>] •OK
•ERROR
Show current setting AT+CHSU? • +CHSU=<mode>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if command is
supported and show
parameter range
AT+CHSU=? • +CHSU: (list of
supported
<modes>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Disable use of UP bit for upgrading. Default value
1 Enable use of UP bit for upgrading
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
126
LZT 123 7468 P1A
127
LZT 123 7468 P1A
8. Fax
8.1 AT*E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification
This command allows the modification of the factory default RS232
comm. setting between standard 9600 baud and 19200 baud. This is
needed as the addition of fax capabilities, within the module, require
communication between fax applications and the module to run at a
higher baud rate than the fax transmission baud rate (In this case the
fastest transmission rate is 9600 baud). Once this command has been
performed, the user must then execute the AT&F command to reset the
module with the new RS232 comm's baud rate.
The AT*E2FAX command allows the user to:
• “Configure” the RS232 Comm. speed default factory profile,
specifying whether the speed should be 9600 baud (standard) or
19200 baud for FAX application comm. This value will then be used
once the AT&F command is next used.
• “Read” what value this default factory profile has been set to.
Examples
AT*E2FAX=?
*E2FAX= (0-1)
OK
Description Command Possible Responses
Request change of fax
comm. baud rate
AT*E2FAX= <RcV> •ERROR
•OK
Displays currently set
rate
AT*E2FAX? • *E2FAX: <RcV>
•ERROR
Shows if the command
is supported
AT*E2FAX=? • *E2FAX: (list of
supported <RcV>s)
•ERROR
<RcV> Description
0Configure RS232 default setting to 9600 baud
1 Configure RS232 default setting to 19200 baud
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
128
LZT 123 7468 P1A
AT*E2FAX?
*E2FAX: 0 (Current default setting is 19200 baud)
OK
AT*E2FAX=0
OK (Sets default RS232 setting to 9600 baud)
8.2 Low Level Fax Commands
The following table of low level fax commands are supported and used
by the GM28 for fax operation.
AT+FAA AT+FBADLIN AT+FBADMUL
AT+FBOR AT+FBUG AT+FCIG
AT+FCLASS AT+FCQ AT+FCR
AT+FDCC AT+FDFFC AT+FDIS
AT+FDR AT+FDT AT+FECM
AT+FET AT+FK AT+FLID
AT+FLNFC AT+FLPL AT+FMDL?
AT+FMFR? AT+FMI? AT+FMINSP
AT+FMM? AT+FMR? AT+FPHCTO
AT+FPTS AT+FRBC AT+FREL
AT+FREV? AT+FRH AT+FRM
AT+FRS AT+FSPL AT+FTBC
AT+FTH AT+FTM AT+FTS
AT+FVRFC AT+FWDFC
129
LZT 123 7468 P1A
9. Identification
9.1 AT Attention Command
This command is used to determine the presence of an MS. If the MS
supports AT commands, it returns an OK final result code.
9.2 AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to default values
specified by the manufacturer, which may take in consideration
hardware configuration and other manufacturer defined criteria.
9.3 AT&W Store User Profile
This command stores the current user profile in non-volatile memory.
Description Command Possible Responses
Checks the communication
between the MS and
application
AT •OK
• +CME ERROR <err>
Description Command Possible Responses
Execute AT&F •OK
•ERROR
Show if supported and
list available
parameter range
AT&F=? &F: (list of supported
<profile>s)
Description Command Possible Responses
Stores the current user
profile to non volatile
memory
AT&W=[<pr>] or
AT&W[<pr>]
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT&W=? &W: (list of supported
<pr>s)
< pr> Description
0Stores current settings in User Profile 0
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
130
LZT 123 7468 P1A
9.4 AT* List all Supported AT Commands
Lists all the commands supported by the MS.
9.5 AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text.
9.6 AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification
Causes the MS to return one or more lines of information text <model>,
determined by the MS manufacturer. It is intended to permit the user of
the ITAE/ETAE to identify the specific model of the MS to which it is
connected. Typically the text will consist of a single line containing the
name of the product, but manufacturers may choose to provide more
information if desired.
Description Command Possible Responses
List all implemented AT
commands
AT* <AT Command1>
[<CR> <LF>
<AT Command2>[…]]
/
<AT Command1>
[<CR> <LF>
<AT Command2>[…]]
Description Command Possible Responses
Request manufacturer
identification
AT+CGMI •<manufacturer>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CGMI=? • OK
•ERROR
<manufacturer> Description
Sony Ericsson This company’s name is displayed
Description Command Possible Responses
Request the model
identification
AT+CGMM •<model type>
<model name>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CGMM=? • OK
•ERROR
<model type> Description
String type A unique ASCII character/digit string, always 10
characters long. Spaces are used when the number of
characters/digits is less than 10
9. IDENTIFICATION
131
LZT 123 7468 P1A
9.7 AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification
This command causes the MS to return a string containing information
about the software version.
9.8 AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification
This command causes the MS to return the IMEI (International Mobile
station Equipment Identity), which identifies the individual ME.
9.9 ATI Identification Information
This command causes the DCE to transmit one or more lines of text,
followed by a final result code. As an option, <value> can be used to
select from among multiple types of identifying information as shown
in the table below.
<model name> Description
String type Model name for the transceiver unit, for example, GM28
Description Command Possible Responses
Request MS revision
identification string
AT+CGMR •<revision>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CGMR=? • OK
•ERROR
<revision> Description
String type An ASCII string containing date (year, month, day, hour,
minute) plus KRC number.
Example: 9710051610 CXC125112
Description Command Possible Responses
Request product serial
number
AT+CGSN •<sn>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CGSN=? • OK
•ERROR
<sn> Description
String The IMEISV, which is the IMEI (International Mobile station
Equipment Identity; refer GSM 03.03) number of the ME and the
software version number. Text shall not contain the sequence
0<CR> or OK<CR>
Description Command Possible Responses
Execute ATI[<value>] <information>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
132
LZT 123 7468 P1A
This command provides compatibility with Microsoft Windows 95.
9.10 AT+GCAP Request Modem Capabilities List
Returns a list of valid modem command prefixes.
<value> Description
0Same information as +GMM command (model
identification)
1 Same information as +GMR command (revision
identification)
3Modem model description
5 Active settings
7Modem configuration profile (brief listing of the modem
functionality: fax classes, Bluetooth, IrDA, modem type,
etc.)
8 DCE hardware type version
9PnP (plug and play) information
Description Command Possible Responses
Request complete
capability list
AT+GCAP +GCAP: (list of
supported
<capability>s)
Test if command is
supported
AT+GCAP=? • OK
•ERROR
<capability> Description GSM 3G1 single mode 3G1 dual mode
+CGSM GSM commands Supported Supported Supported
+FCLASS Facsimile class 1
and 2 commands
Supported Not supported Not supported
+DS V.42 bis
compression
Supported Not supported Supported (only
for Circuit
Switched data
calls in a GSM
network)
133
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10. Interface
10.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
10.2 AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control
Determines the behaviour of the carrier detect.
10.3 AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response
Controls all actions initiated by data terminal ready from DTE.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set behavior of carrier
detect
AT&C[<value>] OK
ERROR
<value> Description
0DCD always on
1 DCD follows the connection. Default value
Description Command Possible Responses
Control actions from
DTE
AT&D[<value>] OK
ERROR
<value> Description
0Ignore. Default value
1 When in on-line data mode, switch to on-line command
mode. For all other states, see <value>=2
2Disconnect and switch to off-line command mode
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
134
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10.4 AT&S Circuit 107 (DSR) Response
Determines the behaviour of the data set ready signal.
10.5 AT+WS46 Mode Selection
Allows an accessory to query and control the cellular protocol mode of
the phone.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set behaviour of data
set ready
AT&S[<value>] •OK
•ERROR
<value> Description
0DSR always on
1 DSR on in data mode. DSR off in command mode. Default
value
Description Command Possible Responses
Sets the cellular
protocol mode
AT+WS46=n •OK
•ERROR
Queries the current
cellular protocol mode
AT+WS46? • <n> OK
•ERROR
Queries the possible
cellular protocol
modes
AT+WS46=? • (list of supported <n>s) OK
•ERROR
<n> parameter Description
12 This value is used for GSM at 900 MHz., DCS-1900, and
PCS-1900 phones
10. INTERFACE
135
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10.6 ATE Command Echo
The setting of this parameter determines whether or not the DCE echoes
characters received from the DTE during command state and online
command state.
10.7 ATV DCE Response Format
Select either descriptive or numeric response codes. The ATV
command sets the verbose numeric response codes and strips off the
<S3><S4> additions to the command response.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request Command
Echo
ATE[<value>]
ATE=[<value>]
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
ATE? <value>
Show if the command
is supported
ATE=? E: (list of supported
<value>s)
<value> Description
0DCE does not echo characters during command state and
online command state
1 DCE echoes characters during command state and online
command state. Default value
Description Command Possible Responses
Set DCE response
format
ATV[=]<value> •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
ATV? V: <value>
Show if the command
is supported
ATV=? V: (list of supported
<value>s)
<value> Description
0Display numeric result codes
1 Display verbose result codes. Default value
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
136
LZT 123 7468 P1A
List of result codes
10.8 ATZ Reset to Default Configuration
This command instructs the DCE to set all parameters to their default
values as specified by the user. Consider hardware configuration
switches or non-volatile parameter storage (if implemented) when using
this command.
ATV1/ATV=1 ATV0/ATV=0 Description
OK 0Acknowledges execution of a
command
CONNECT 1 A connection has been established;
the DCE is moving from command
state to online data state
RING 2The DCE has detected an incoming
call signal from the network
NO CARRIER 3 The connection has been terminated
or the attempt to establish a
connection failed
ERROR 4Command not recognized, command
line maximum length exceeded,
parameter value invalid, or other
problem with processing the command
line
NO DIALTONE 6 No dial tone detected
BUSY 7Engaged (busy) signal detected
NO ANSWER 8 “@” (Wait for Quiet Answer) dial
modifier was used, but remote ringing
followed by five seconds of silence was
not detected before expiration of the
connection timer
CONNECT
<TEXT>
Manufacturer
-specific
Same as CONNECT, but includes
manufacturer-specific text that may
specify DTE speed, line speed, error
control, data compression, or other
status
Description Command Possible Responses
Execute ATZ •OK
•ERROR
Execute ATZ=<profile> • OK
•ERROR
Show if supported and
list available
parameter range
ATZ=? Z: (list of supported
<profile>s)
10. INTERFACE
137
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Commands included on the same command line as the Z command will
be ignored.
10.9 AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol
SI C25-68003
The command is used to turn on the multiplexer. Only “no transparency
is supported”. The parameter <k> is not used.
The default values for the parameters below are for “no transparency”
and “only UIH frames used”.
<profile > Description
0Select the user profile to restore
Description Command Possible Responses
Switch to 07.10 AT+CMUX=<transpa
rency>[,<subset>[,
<port_speed>[,<N1>
[,<T1>[,<N2>[,<T2>
[,<T3>[,<k>]]]]]]]]
+CME ERROR: <err>
Returns current
setting for
multiplexer
AT+CMUX? • +CMUX:<transparency>,
<subset>,<port_speed>,<N1>
,<T1>,<N2>,<T2>,<T3>[,<k>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show list of
supported
services
AT+CMUX=? • +CMUX: (list of supported
<transparency>s),
(list of supported <subset>s),
(list of supported
<port_speed>s),
(list of supported <N1>s),
(list of supported <T1>s),
(list of supported <N2>s),
(list of supported <T2>s),
(list of supported <T3>s),
(list of supported <k>)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
<transparency> Description
0No transparency
<subset> Description
0Only UIH frames used
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
138
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<port_speed> Description
19600bits/s
219200bits/s
338400bits/s
457600bits/s
5115200bits/s
6 230400bits/s
7460800bits/s
<N1> Description
31 Default maximum frame size
<T1> Description
10 100ms default timer
<N2> Description
3Default maximum number of re-transmissions
<T2> Description
30 300ms default timer
<T3> Description
10 10s default timer
<k> Description
1..7 Window size
10. INTERFACE
139
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10.10 AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings
Restores message service settings from non-volatile memory to active
memory. A TA can contain several profiles of settings. Settings
specified in commands Service Centre Address +CSCA, Set Message
Parameters +CSMP and Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
(if implemented) are restored. Certain settings, such as SIM SMS
parameters, cannot be restored.
10.11 AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format
This extended-format compound parameter is used to determine the
local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing used by the
DCE to accept DTE commands, and while transmitting information text
and result code, if this is not automatically determined; (Not
supported) +IPR=0 forces +ICF=0 (see +IPR).
Description Command Possible Responses
Restore settings AT+CRES[=<profile>] • +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Get available profiles AT+CRES=? • +CRES: (list of
supported
<profile>s)
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<profile> Description
0..2 Profile number where settings are to be stored. Default
value is 0
Description Command Possible Responses
Defines DTE-DCE
character framing
AT+ICF=[format[,parity]] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+ICF? • +ICF:
<format>,<parity>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+ICF=? • +ICF: (list of
supported
<format>s), (list of
supported <parity>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<format> Description
38 Data 1 Stop. Default value
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
140
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10.12 AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control
Defines the flow control between the modem and the computer when in
on-line data mode.
No flow control is enabled in any of the command modes.
<parity> Description
3Space. Default value
Description Command Possible Responses
Defines DTE-DCE local
flow control
AT+IFC=[<by_te>,
[<by_ta>]]
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+IFC? +IFC: <by_te>,<by_ta>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+IFC=? +IFC: (list of supported
<by_te>s,<by_ta>s)
<by_te> Description
0No flow control on DTE
1 Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are
removed by the DCE interface
2RTS flow control on DCE. Default value
3 Xon/Xoff flow control on DCE. Control characters are
passed to the remote DCE/DTE
<by_ta> Description
0No flow control on DCE
1 Xon/Xoff flow control on DTE
2CTS flow control on DCE. Default value
10. INTERFACE
141
LZT 123 7468 P1A
10.13 AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting
Specifies whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>”
information text is transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate>
reported shall represent the current (negotiated or renegotiated) DTE-
DCE rate. If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted after
any modulation, error control or data compression reports are
transmitted, and before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) is
transmitted. The <rate> is applied after the final result code is
transmitted.
10.14 AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command
Specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands, in
addition to 1200bits/s or 9600bits/s (as required in v25ter, subclause
4.3). It may be used to select operation at rates used by the DTE, which
the DCE is not capable of automatically detecting.
Description Command Possible Responses
Defines DTE-DCE
character framing
AT+ILRR=<value> •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+ILRR? +ILRR:<value>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+ILRR=? +ILRR:(list of supported
<values>s)
<value> Description
0Disables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is not
transmitted). Default value
1 Enables reporting of local port rate (+ILRR: is transmitted)
Description Command Possible Responses
Defines fixed DTE rate AT+IPR=[rate] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+IPR? • +IPR:<rate>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+IPR=? • +IPR: (), (list of fixed-
only <rate>s)]
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
142
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The specified rate takes effect following the issuance of any result
code(s) associated with the current command line.
10.15 AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time
Defines a guard time for the escape sequence in GPRS to return to on-
line command mode i.e. if +++AT<CR> is received either as part of the
data stream or a terminating string from the application and no further
data is received for the duration of the guard time the modem will go
into on line command mode. This guards against the modem
accidentally going into on line command mode. The verbose format of
+++AT<CR> is <S2><S2><S2>AT<S3>.
<rate> Description
Discrete
integer value
The <rate> value specified shall be the rate in bits per
second at which the DTE-DCE interface should operate,
e.g. “19200” or “115200”. The rates supported by a
particular DCE are manufacturer specific.
The following rates, are supported;
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
230400
460800
Description Command Possible responses
Set GPRS online
command guard time
AT*E2ESC=[<gt>] •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT*E2ESC? *E2ESC: <gt>
Show if the command
is supported
AT*E2ESC=? •OK
•ERROR
<gt> Description
0No guard time. Default value
1-10 Guard time in seconds
143
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11. Network
11.1 AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description
Controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code E2CD: when
<n>=1, or when there is a change in one of the network cell parameters,
E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>.
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and several
values, which show the network cell parameters.
Location information <lac>, <ci> and <ta> are returned only when
<n>=1 and the ME is registered in the network. To know if the ME is
registered use the AT+CREG command. If the ME is not registered in
the cellular network an ERROR message is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request network cell
description
AT*E2CD=<n> •ERROR
•OK
Read the command AT*E2CD? • *E2CD:
<n>,<lac>,<ci>,<ta>
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT*E2CD=? • *E2CD: (list of
supported <n>s)
•ERROR
<n> Description
0 Disable network location information unsolicited result
code. Default value
1 Enable network location information unsolicited result
code *E2CD: <lac>,<ci>,<ta>
<lac> Description
String type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci> Description
string type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
144
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<ta> Description
0-63 According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing
advance value is the binary representation of the timing
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the
integer representation of the timing advance in binary
format
64-255 Reserved
11. NETWORK
145
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.2 AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode
Description Command Possible Responses
Set the
response
presentation
mode
AT*E2EMM=
<n>[,<m>]
•ERROR
•OK
Display mode
neighbour cells
are taken from
the toplist
*E2EMM:
Serving Cell
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,
C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,T
N],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>
[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,
<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>],
NeighBours Cells
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,
C2],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
Compact mode.
The first cell is the
serving cell, the
rest are
neighbour cells
taken from the
toplist
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,
<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>][,<rxlSub>,<rxqsub>,
<ta>],<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>,
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>,
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>
OK
Verbose mode.
The first cell is the
serving cell and
the rest are
neighbour cells
as provided by
the network in
the system info.
messages (2 and
5) and via the
AT*E2NBTS
command
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,
<ta>,<tn>],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
Reduced display
mode - info. as
display mode but
without text
headings or
<CR><LF>
separators,
neighbour cells
from top list
*E2EMM: <mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>]
[,<rxlFull>,<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,
<ta>,<tn>],
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]
OK
Read the
command
AT*E2EMM? • *E2EMM: <n>
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT*E2EMM=
?
• *E2EMM: (list of supported <n>s),(list
of supported <m>s)
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
146
LZT 123 7468 P1A
There are four presentation format modes (Display, Compact, Verbose,
and Reduced Display) and two response types (one shot response or
continuous unsolicited responses).
The purpose of the presentation format mode Display is to display the
data in a readable form, including headers and line breaks
(<CR><LF>). This format is, however, not well suited for machine
decoding. The formats Verbose, Compact and Reduced Display do not
have headers or line breaks. Verbose mode displays more parameters
than the compact mode.
The response types give the user the choice of one a shot information or
an unsolicited response with <m> seconds between each response.
Examples
AT*E2EMM=1
*E2EMM:<CR><LF>
Serving Cell<CR><LF>
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch[,RxL,C1,C2][,RxLFull,RxLSub,
RxQFull,RxQSub,TA,TN]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>[,<rxl>,<c1>,<c2>][,<rxlFull>,
<rxlSub>,<rxqfull>,<rxqsub>,<ta>,<tn>]<CR><LF>
NeighBours Cells<CR><LF>
MCC,MNC,LAC,CellID,BSIC,Ch,RxL[,C1,C2]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,<lac>,<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,<rxl>[,<c1>,<c2>]<CR><LF>
OK
AT*E2EMM=3
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell ci>,
<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>][,<servcell rxlSub>,
<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>],<neighborcell1 mcc>,
<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,
<neighborcell1 ch>,<neighborcell1 rxl>,<neighborcell2 mcc>,
<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,
<neighborcell2 ch>,<neighborcell2 rxl>,
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcellnci>,
<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,<neighborcelln rxl>
<CR><LF>
OK
AT*E2EMM=5
*E2EMM: <servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,
<servcell C1>,<servcell C2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell tn>,<servcell ta>],
11. NETWORK
147
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<neighborcell1 mcc>,<neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,<neighborcell1 C1>,<neighborcell1 C2>],
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 C1>,<neighborcell2 C2>],
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcellnmnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln C1>,<neighborcelln C2>]
<CR><LF>
OK
AT*E2EMM=7
*E2EMM:<servcell mcc>,<servcell mnc>,<servcell lac>,
<servcell ci>,<servcell bsic>,<servcell ch>[,<servcell rxl>,
<servcell c1>,<servcell c2>][,<servcell rxlFull>,<servcell rxlSub>,
<servcell rxqfull>,<servcell rxqsub>,<servcell ta>,<servcell tn>],
<neighborcell1 mcc>,< neighborcell1 mnc>,<neighborcell1 lac>,
<neighborcell1 ci>,<neighborcell1 bsic>,<neighborcell1 ch>,
<neighborcell1 rxl>[,< neighborcell1 c1>,<neighborcell1 c2>],
<neighborcell2 mcc>,<neighborcell2 mnc>,<neighborcell2 lac>,
<neighborcell2 ci>,<neighborcell2 bsic>,<neighborcell2 ch>,
<neighborcell2 rxl>[,<neighborcell2 c1>,<neighborcell2c2>]
…
<neighborcelln mcc>,<neighborcelln mnc>,<neighborcelln lac>,
<neighborcelln ci>,<neighborcelln bsic>,<neighborcelln ch>,
<neighborcelln rxl>[,<neighborcelln c1>,<neighborcelln c2>]
OK
The mode setting <n> in the set command has the combination listed in
the table below.
When <n>=5, the shot information is the same as in <n>=1, but
neighbouring cells, which have to be up to 16. This is the information
that comes from the Serving Cell through the BCCH, reporting the BTS
that are on the Serving Cell's surroundings.
<n> Description
0Disable network monitoring unsolicited result code.
Default value
1 One shot presentation of the network location
information. Display mode with headers and <CR><LF>
line separators
2 Enable network location information unsolicited result
code in Display mode (like n=1). There will be continuous
unsolicited information responses <m> seconds apart
3 One shot presentation of the compact network location
information
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
148
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4Enable compact network location information unsolicited
result code. There will be continuous unsolicited
information responses <m> seconds apart
5 One shot presentation of the network location information
(verbose format), including 16 BTSs, coming from the
Serving Cell signalling information
6As n=5 format but there will be continuous unsolicited
information responses <m> seconds apart
7 One shot presentation of the network information (same
information as in n=1) but no headers or <CR><LF> line
separators. Neighbor cells from the Toplist
8As n=7 format but there will be continuous unsolicited
information responses <m> seconds apart
<m> Description
1-255 Integer type giving time (in seconds) between unsolicited
responses. Default value is 5
<mcc> Description
Integer type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<mnc> Description
Integer type Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell
<lac> Description
Integer type Two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci> Description
Integer type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<bsic> Description
Integer type One byte Base Stations Identification code in
hexadecimal format
<ch> Description
(0-1023) It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF
Channel, which identifies the BCCH carrier
<n> Description
11. NETWORK
149
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<rxqsub> is the parameter that indicates the quality in the received
signal on dedicated mode. The measurement average is applied to a
subset of a SACCH multiframe.
<rxl> Description
Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm measured on idle
mode
<rxlfull> Description
Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is
taken in the Downlink and statistically is applied to 100
TDMA frames of the TCH or during a SACCH multiframe
<rxlsub> Description
Integer type Received Signal Strength level in dBm. The Rx Level is
taken from the DownLink signal and the average is
applied to subset of SACCH frames
<rxqfull> Description
0BER < 0.1%
1 0.26% < BER < 0.30%
20.51% < BER < 0.64%
31.0% < BER < 1.3%
41.9% < BER < 2.7%
53.8% < BER < 5.4%
67.6% < BER < 11.0%
7 BER > 15.0%
<mcc> Description
Integer type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<rxqsub> Description
0BER < 0.1%
1 0.26% < BER < 0.30%
20.51% < BER < 0.64%
31.0% < BER < 1.3%
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
150
LZT 123 7468 P1A
41.9% < BER < 2.7%
5 3.8% < BER < 5.4%
67.6% < BER < 11.0%
7 BER > 15.0%
<c1> Description
Integer Path Loss criterion parameter for neighbour cells. The MS
calculates this parameter, in idle mode, to decide if the
cell is suitable to camp on. After the calculation the
criterion is C1 > 0. See GSM 05.08
<c2> Description
Integer Cell reselection parameter for neighbour cells. This
parameter shall optimise the selected cell reselection
<ta> Description
0-63 According to GSM 04.18 V8.6.0, the coding of the timing
advance value is the binary representation of the timing
advance in bit periods; 1 bit period = 48/13 ìs. <ta> is the
integer representation of the timing advance in binary
format
64-255 Reserved
<tn> Description
0-7 Its value indicates the time slot number in a traffic channel
<rxqsub> Description
11. NETWORK
151
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.3 AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication
Causes the MS to return the service provider name stored in the SIM
card (<spi> parameter). The text will consist of a maximum of 16 bytes
containing the service provider name stored in the EFSPN file in the SIM
card (see GSM 11.11). ERROR is returned if the field is not present on
the SIM.
11.4 AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status
Used to request the MS to give ALS (Alternate Line Services) status.
The information is available on the SIM card. If ALS is active, the user
has two lines for voice calls. The line number or name tag for the line is
then indicated on the display.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request service
provider indication
AT*E2SPN • *E2SPN: <spi>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT*E2SPN=? • OK
•ERROR
<spi> Description
String String type field of maximum length 16 bytes; character
set as specified by command Select TE character set
+CSCS
Description Command Possible Responses
Requests current status
for ALS
AT*EALS •*EALS: <status>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*EALS=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<status> Description
0ALS function is not active (off)
1 ALS function is active (on)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
152
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.5 AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile
This command is used to read the customer service profile (CSP) from
the SIM. CSP is a list on the SIM, which indicates the services that are
user accessible. Each of the services has a related bit within the CSP.
The services are grouped into service groups, with a maximum of 8
services in a group. For each service group, a bit mask tells which
services are available (bit=1). Unused bits are set to 0.
Description Command Possible Responses
Read the customer
service profile from the
SIM
AT*ECSP=<service
group>
•*ECSP: <service
group>,<services>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*ECSP=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<service
group>
Description
Byte Each service group has a corresponding number, service
group code
<services> Description
byte Bit mask (8 bits), indicating the services within the service
group
Bit=0: unused or unavailable service
Bit=1: available service
11. NETWORK
153
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.6 AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network
This command is used to read the SIM preferred list of networks
(EFPLMNSEL).
Description Command Possible Responses
Read entries in SIM
preferred list
AT*EPNR=<format>
[,<index1>
[,<index2]]
•*EPNR:
<index1>,<oper1>[...]
*EPNR: <index2>,
<oper2>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and list the
possible settings
AT*EPNR=? • *EPNR: (list of
supported <index>s),
(list of supported
<format>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<index1> Description
integer Start index (>0)
<index2> Description
integer Stop index (>0)
<format> Description
2Numeric <oper>
<oper> Description
string String indicates the code for the operator.
E.g. GSM - Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
154
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.7 AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network
This command is used to edit the SIM preferred list of networks
(EFPLMNSEL). The entry field <oper> contains mobile country code
(MCC) and mobile network code (MNC).
11.8 AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number
This command requests the SIM serial number held in the ICCid field
(address 2FE2) on the SIM and returns all valid characters to the TE.
This field is detailed in GSM 11.11 section 10.1.1.
Description Command Possible Responses
Write/delete entries in
SIM preferred list
AT*EPNW=[<index>]
[,<format>,<oper>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and list the
possible settings
AT*EPNW=? • *EPNW: (list of
supported
<index>s), (list of
supported
<format>)s
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<index> Description
Integer Index to entry in SIM preferred list.
The SIM preferred list contains at least 8 positions
according to GSM 11.11
<format> Description
2Numeric <oper>
<oper> Description
String String indicates the code for the operator.
E.g. GSM – Sweden - Europolitan: “24008” (3 + 2).
PCS: 3 digits for country and 3 digits for network
Description Command Possible Responses
Request SIM Serial
number
AT*E2SSN? *E2ESSN: <SSN>
Shows if the command
is supported
AT*E2SSN=? • OK
•ERROR
<SSN> Description
String without
double quotes
SIM serial number
11. NETWORK
155
LZT 123 7468 P1A
EXAMPLES
AT*E2SSN?
8944110063503224707
OK
where the raw data contained in the ICCid field on the SIM is
984411003605234207F7.
Test command:
AT*E2SSN=?
OK
11.9 AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name
Sets the name tag for a selected line.
Description Command Possible Responses
Sets the line name tag
in the MS
AT*ESLN=<line>
[,<name>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT*ESLN? • *ESLN:
<line1>,<name1><CR><LF>
*ESLN: <line2>,<name2>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and list the
possible settings
AT*ESLN=? • *ESLN: (list of supported
<line>s),<lname>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<line> Description
0This means that the two lines will use the default name
tags, i.e. “L1” and “L2”. Default value
1 Line 1
2Line 2
<name> Description
String Characters for name tag
This parameter is optional when <line> is set to 0
<lname> Description
Integer Maximum number of characters to use in <name> string
(20)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
156
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.10 AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification
Causes the TA to return <IMSI>, identifying the individual SIM
attached to the ME.
11.11 AT+CLCK Facility Lock
The command is used to lock, unlock or interrogate an ME or a network
facility <fac>. A password is normally needed to carry out such actions.
Call barring facilities are based on GSM supplementary services (refer
to GSM 02.88). The interaction of these, with other commands based on
other GSM supplementary services, is described in the GSM standard.
Description Command Possible Responses
Read IMSI AT+CIMI •<IMSI>
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CIMI=? • OK
•ERROR
<IMSI> Description
string without
double quotes
International Mobile Subscriber Identity
Description Command Possible Responses
Request facility lock AT+CLCK=<fac>,
<mode>[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
• when <mode>=2 and
command successful:
+CLCK:
<status>[,<class1>
[<CR><LF>+CLCK:
<status>,<class2>[...]]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CLCK=? • +CLCK: (list of
supported <fac>s)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
<fac> Description
“CS” CNTRL (lock CoNTRoL surface (e.g. phone keyboard))
“PS” PH-SIM (lock PHone to SIM card) (ME asks password when
other than current SIM card inserted)
“SC” SIM (lock SIM card) (SIM asks password in ME power-up
and when this lock command issued)
“FD” SIM fixed dialling feature. PIN2 is required as a password
“P2” SIM PIN2
11. NETWORK
157
LZT 123 7468 P1A
“AO” BAOC (bar all outgoing calls)
“OI” BOIC (bar outgoing international calls)
“AI” BAIC (bar all incoming calls)
“IR” BIC-Roam (bar incoming calls when roaming outside the
home country)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (bar outgoing international calls except to
home country)
“AB” All barring services
“AG” All out going barring services
“AC” All in coming barring services
“PN” Network personalization
“PU” Network subset personalization
“PP” Service provider personalization
“PC” Corporate personalization
<mode> Description
0Unlock
1Lock
2Query status
10 Full lock (only valid for <fac>=“PS”, after power on always
ask for password)
<status> Description
0Not active
1Active
<passw> Description
string type Is the same as password specified for the facility from the
ME user interface or with change password command,
+CPWD
<classx> Description
1Voice L1
2Data
4Fax
8 Short message service
<fac> Description
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
158
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.12 AT+CNUM Subscriber Number
This command returns the MSISDNs related to the subscriber (this
information can be stored in the SIM or in the ME). If subscriber has
different MSISDN for different services, each MSISDN is returned in a
separate line.
16 Data circuit sync
32 Data circuit async
64 Dedicated packet access
128 Voice L2
1..30 When “no reply” is enabled or queried, this gives the time
in seconds to wait before the call is forwarded. Default
value is 20
<classx> Description
Description Command Possible Responses
Request subscriber
number
AT+CNUM •+CNUM:
[<alpha1>],<number1>,<type1>
[,<speed>,<service>[,<itc>]][<CR>
<LF>+CNUM:
[<alpha2>],<number2>,<type2>
[,<speed>,<service> [,<itc>]][…]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CNUM=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<alphax> Description
Alphanumeric
string
Associated with <numberx>; used character set should be
the one selected with the Select TE character set
command, +CSCS
<numberx> Description
String type Phone number of format specified by <typex>
<typex> Description
Integer format Type of address, (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)
<speed> Description
data rate As defined in subclause 6.7 GSM 07.07
11. NETWORK
159
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.13 AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation
This command refers to the GSM/UMTS supplementary service COLP
(Connected Line Identification Presentation) that enables a calling
subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called party
after setting up a mobile originated call. The command enables or
disables the presentation of the COL at the TE. It has no effect on the
execution of the supplementary service COLR in the network.
When enabled (and allowed by the called subscriber), +COLP:
<number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]] intermediate
result code is returned from the TA to the TE before any +CR or V.25ter
responses. It is manufacturer specific if this response is used when
normal voice call is established.
Read command gives the status of <n>, and also triggers an
interrogation of the provision status of the COLP service according
3GPP TS 22.081 (given in <m>).
<service> Description
0Asynchronous modem
4Voice
5Fax
<itc> Description
03.1kHz
1 UDI
Description Command Possible Responses
Request connected
line identification
presentation
AT+COLP=[<n>] •OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+COLP? • +COLP: <n>,<m>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+COLP=? • +COLP: (list of
supported <n>s)
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
160
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Intermediate Result codes:
+COLP: <number>,<type>[,<subaddr>,<satype> [,<alpha>]]
<n> Description
0Disable
1 Enable
<m> Description
0COLP not provisioned
1 COLP provisioned
2unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
11. NETWORK
161
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.14 AT+COPS Operator Selection
Forces an attempt to select and register the GSM network operator.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request operator
selection
AT+COPS=[<mode>
[,<format>
[,<oper>]]]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+COPS? • +COPS:
<mode>[,<format>,
<oper>]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+COPS=? • +COPS: list of supported
(<stat>,long
alphanumeric <oper>,
short alphanumeric
<oper>,numeric
<oper>)s
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
<mode> Description
0Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)
1 Manual (<oper> field present)
3Set only <format> (for read command +COPS?), do not
attempt registration/de-registration (<oper> field is
ignored); this value is not applicable in read command
response
4 Manual/automatic (<oper> field present); if manual
selection fails, automatic mode (<mode>=0) is entered
<format> Description
0Automatic (<oper> field is ignored)
1 Short format alphanumeric <oper>
2Numeric <oper>
<oper> Description
string type Format determined by the <format> setting
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
162
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.15 AT+CREG Network Registration
Set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code
+CREG: <stat> when <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network
registration status.
Read command returns the status of result code presentation and an
integer <stat>, which shows whether the network has currently
indicated the registration of the ME.
Controls the presentation of the unsolicited result code +CREG.
<stat> Description
0Unknown
1 Available
2Current
3 Forbidden
Description Command Possible Responses
Request network
registration
AT+CREG=[<n>] •+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the command AT+CREG? • +CREG: <n>,<stat>
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CREG=? • +CREG: (list of
supported <n>s)
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<n> Description
0Disable network registration unsolicited result code.
Default value
1 Enable network registration unsolicited result code
<stat> Description
0Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new
operator to register with
1 Registered, home network
11. NETWORK
163
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.16 AT*ECPI Ciphering Indicator
This command allows the external application to activate/deactivate the
ciphering indication. The ciphering indication allows the external
application to detect when the mobile connection becomes deciphered
and thus unsecured.
Test command gives the current value of the <switch> parameter,
informing if the indicator is enabled or disabled.
The ciphering indicator feature may be disabled by the home network
operator setting data in the “administrative data” field (EFAD) in the
SIM as defined in GSM 11.11.
If this feature is not disabled by the SIM, then whenever a connection is
in place, which is or becomes deciphered, an indication is given via the
unsolicited result code *ECPV:<ciphering>.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*ECPV: <ciphering>. Sent only when <switch> is set to 0.
2Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new
operator to register with
3 Registration denied
4Unknown
5 Registered, roaming
<stat> Description
Description Command Possible Responses
Request activation of
the ciphering
indication
AT*ECPI=<switch> •OK
• +CME: <error>
•ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT*ECPI? • *ECPI: <switch>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT*ECPI=? • *ECPI: (list of supported
<switch>es values)
•OK
•ERROR
<switch> Description
1Ciphering indication is on. The unsolicited result code
*ECPV is sent anytime the communication is unsecured
and when it becomes secure again
0 Ciphering indication is off. Disable the ciphering
indication, *ECPV is not sent
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
164
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result Codes
*ECPV - Ciphering Indicator
SYNTAX - Unsolicited Result code
Description Response When
Set command informs
the TE when a
communication is
unsecured due to the
fact that the network
is not enciphering the
communication
*ECPV: <ciphering> When AT*ECPI enables it,
the *ECPV:<ciphering> is
sent during a connection
whenever the
communication is not
enciphered. If a
connection becomes
secure after that, the
*ECPV:<ciphering> is sent
again to indicate that now
the communication is
enciphered
<ciphering> Description
0The connection is secured. The network enciphers the
communication
1 The connection is unsecured. The network does not
encipher the communication
11. NETWORK
165
LZT 123 7468 P1A
11.17 AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS
The set command shall provide with the ARFCNs (<ch>) and the BSIC
(the BSIC is a cell colour code) to the MS in order to monitor those
channels, belonging to the neighbour cells, instead of the ones that come
through the air interface, in the serving cell information broadcast
channel.
It is possible to update that information with up to 16 neighbour cells.
If less than 16 <ch>s are provided, then the assigned channels shall
substitute the last previous channel (given either by the BCCH or by
another AT*E2NBTS command), if it is not in the list yet. Therefore,
<ch1>,<bsic1> will substitute BTS 16 in the MS, <ch2>,<bsic2> to the
BTS 15 and so on. If any of the <ch>s is already in the top-list, then it
is skipped.
The read command displays the data of every neighbour cell, including
the following parameters: MCC, MNC, Cell ID, BSIC, Channel and Rx
Level.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Neighbour
Cells to monitor
AT*E2NBTS=<ch1>,<bsic1>[,<ch2
>,<bsic2>[,<ch3>,<bsic3>[,<ch4
>,<bsic4>[,<ch5>,<bsic5>[,<ch6
>,<bsic6>[,<ch7>,<bsic7>[,<ch8
>,<bsic8>[,<ch9>,<bsic9>[,<ch1
0>,<bsic10>[,<ch11>,<bsic11>[,<
ch12>,<bsic12>[,<ch13>,<bsic13
>[,<ch14>,<bsic14>[,<ch15>,<bsi
c15>[,<ch16>,<bsic16>]]]]]]]]]]]]]
]]
•ERROR
•OK
Read the
monitored
neighbour cells
AT*E2NBTS? • *E2NBTS:
<mcc>,<mnc>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl><CR><LF>
<mcc>,<mnc>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl><CR><LF>
…
<mcc>,<mnc>,
<ci>,<bsic>,<ch>,
<rxl><CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT*E2NBTS=? • *E2NBTS: (list of
supported <ch>s)
•ERROR
<ch> Description
(0-1023) It represents the ARFCN that shows the Absolute RF
Channel, which identifies a BCCH carrier
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
166
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<mcc> Description
String Type Three digits in decimal format. The Mobile Country Code
identifies the PLMN serving cell country according to ITU
<mnc> Description
String Type Two digits in decimal format. The Mobile Network Code
identifies the PLMN operator in the serving cell
<ci> Description
String type Two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
<bsic> Description
String Type One byte Base Stations Identification code in
hexadecimal format
<rxl> Description
String Type Received Signal Strength level in dBm, measured in idle
mode
167
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12. Phonebook
12.1 AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum
Command causes the ME to return the phone book checksum <cks>
stored internally . Phone book checksum is recalculated whenever there
is a change in the phone book. By requesting the checksum, the external
application can detect if the phone book in the ME has changed, without
downloading the whole phone book.
During the SIM initialisation process, it takes some time to download
the phone book from the SIM card to the ME, depending on the number
of entries. In case the command is invoked before the checksum has
been calculated, the ME gives an ERROR message.
12.2 AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group
This command adds a contact or a phone number to the current group.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request phone book
checksum
AT*E2PBCS •*E2PBCS: <cks>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT*E2PBCS=? • OK
•ERROR
<cks> Description
Hex type 1 byte in hexadecimal (between “”), containing the
checksum
Description Command Possible Responses
Adds a new item to the
group with <gindex>
AT*ESAG=<gindex>,
<type>,
<itemindex>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported and list the
possible settings
AT*ESAG=? • *ESAG: (list of
supported
<gindex>s, list of
supported <type>s
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
168
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.3 AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group
This command creates a new group in the hierarchical phone book. The
group is stored at the first available position. There are 10 group
positions in the hierarchical phone book.
<gindex> Description
1-10 The group index within the hierarchical phone book
<type> Description
1Contact
2 Phone number
<itemindex> Description
Integer The index of the contact/group/phone number to add.
The <itemindex> parameter has the following meaning: if
the item to add is a contact, the <itemindex> is the index
of the contact in the contacts book. If the item to add is a
phone number the <itemindex> is the index in the phone
book
Description Command Possible Responses
Adds a new group to
the hierarchical phone
book
AT*ESCG=<name> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Shows if the command
is supported
AT*ESCG=? • *ESCG:
<maxnamelength>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<name> Description
String The group name. Character set as specified by
command Select TE Character Set (AT+CSCS)
<maxnamelength> Description
integer The maximum length of the grouping (bytes)
12. PHONEBOOK
169
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.4 AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number
Command is used to:
• set up a credit card number in the ME.
• disable credit card calls.
• enable one of the credit card call services.
• query the settings for one of the services.
• query the active credit call access server.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set up a credit
card number
AT*ESCN=<mode>
[,<passwd>][,<indexn>]
[,<asn>,<type>,<name>,
<vercode>[,<send
order>]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
when mode=3:*ESCN:
<indexn>,<asn>,<type>,
<name>,<vercode>,
<send order>
When mode=4:*ESCN:
<selindexn>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*ESCN=? • *ESCN: (list of supported
<index>s),(list of
supported <mode>s),(list
of supported <send
order>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Settings for a credit card call (<passwd>, <indexn>,
<asn>,<type>,<name>,<vercode> [,<send order>]). The
four (4) parameters (<passwd>, <indexn>, <asn>,
<vercode>) are mandatory when <mode>=0. If all those
are not submitted ERROR will be returned
1 Disable credit card calling (<passwd>). If any other
parameters are submitted, they are ignored
2Enable one of the credit card call services (<passwd>,
<indexn>). If any other parameters are submitted, they
are ignored
3 Query (<passwd>, <indexn>). If any other parameters are
submitted, they are ignored
4Query for the selected credit call access server. If any
parameters are submitted, they are ignored
<passwd> Description
String character string, phone lock code “PS”, PH-SIM
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
170
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<indexn> Description
1Index number to the first credit card call access server
2 Index number to the second credit card call access server
<selindexn> Description
0Credit card calling disabled
1 Index number to the first credit card call access server
2Index number to the second credit card call access server
<asn> Description
String Character string <0..9,+>, max. 20 characters Phone
number of format specified by <typex>
<type> Description
Integer format Type of address
<name> Description
String Character string of the name tag, for M&M. Maximum of
18 characters
<vercode> Description
String Character string <0..9,#,*>. Maximum of 20 characters
<send order> Description
1Verification code first. Default value
2 phone number to call first
12. PHONEBOOK
171
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.5 AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group
This command deletes the group at position <gindex> from the
hierarchical phone book.
12.6 AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item
The command deletes the item with <index> in the group with
<gindex>.
Description Command Possible Responses
Deletes a group
defined in the
hierarchical phone
book
AT*ESDG=<gindex> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
Show if the command
is supported and list the
possible <gindex>
AT*ESDG=? • *ESDG: list of
<gindex>s
•OK
<gindex> Description
1-10 The group index
Description Command Possible Responses
Deletes the item in
group <gindex> with
position <index>
AT*ESDI=<gindex>,<ind
ex>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT*ESDI=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<gindex> Description
1-10 The groups index within the hierarchical phone book
<index> Description
1-15 The items index within the group
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
172
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.7 AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read
This command lists the groups in the hierarchical phone book.
12.8 AT*EGIR Ericsson Group Item Read
This command lists the items stored in the group identified by
<gindex>.
Description Command Possible Responses
Lists the groups defined
in the hierarchical
phone book
AT*ESGR • *ESGR: <gindex1>,
<name1>[<CR><LF>
<gindex2>,
<name2>..]
•OK
•ERROR
Shows if the command
is supported
AT*ESGR=? OK
<gindex> Description
1-10 The group index
<name> Description
String The group name
Description Command Possible Responses
Lists the items in the
<gindex> group
AT*EGIR=<gindex> • *EGIR: <index1>,
<type1>,<itemindex>
[<CF><LF><index2>,
<type2>, <itemindex>
[...]]
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT*EGIR=? • OK
•ERROR
<gindex> Description
1-10 The groups index within the hierarchical phonebook
<index> Description
1-15 The items index within the group
<type> Description
Integer The kind of item. See AT*ESAG <item> table for definition
12. PHONEBOOK
173
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.9 AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number
This command sets a <type> number, in the format <number type>, in
the MS.
<itemindex> Description
Integer The item's index within the phonebook/contacts/group
Description Command Possible Responses
Sets a number in the
MS
AT*ESNU=<type>,
<number>[,<number
type>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and show
possible settings
AT*ESNU=? • *ESNU: (list of
supported <type>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT*ESNU? • *ESNU: <type 1>,
<number 1>,
<number type 1>
<CR><LF> ….*ESNU:
<type n>,
<number n>,
<number type n>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<type> Description
0Voice L1
1Voice L2
2Fax
3Data
<number type> Description
129 Default value when dialling string does not include the
international access code character ‘+’
145 Default value when dialling string includes the
international access code character ‘+’
<number> Description
0-9, + Number
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
174
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.10 AT+CPBF Phonebook Find
Returns phone book entries whose alphanumeric field starts with
<findtext>. Only currently selected source will be searched for,
12.11 AT+CPBR Phonebook Read
Returns phone book entries in location number range <index1>...
<index2> from the current phone book memory storage selected with
+CPBS. If <index2> is left out, only location <index1> is returned.
Entry fields returned are location number <indexn>, phone number
stored there <number> (of format <type>) and text <text> associated
with the number.
Description Command Possible Responses
Shows the current
setting
+CPBF=<findtext> •+CPBF:
<index1>,<number>,<type>,
<text>[[...]<CR><LF>+CBPF:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,
<text>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
+CPBF=? • +CPBF: <nlength>,<tlength>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
• ERROR
<findtext> Description
string type Field of maximum length <tlength>; character set as
specified by the select TE character set command, +CSCS
Description Command Possible Responses
Read phone
book entries
+CPBR=<index1>
[,<index2>]
• +CPBR:<index1>,<number>,
<type>,<text>[[,<text_date>,
<text_time>]<CR><LF>+CPBR:
<index2>,<number>,<type>,
<text>[,<text_date>,
<text_time>]]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
+CPBR=? • +CPBR: (list of supported
<index>s),<nlength>,<tlength>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
<indexn> Description
integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phone book
memory
12. PHONEBOOK
175
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<number> Description
string type Phone number of format <type>
<type> Description
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
<text> Description
string type Field of maximum length <tlength>;
character set as specified by the select TE character set
command, +CSCS.
<nlength> Description
integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
<tlength> Description
integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
176
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.12 AT+CPBS Phone Storage
Selects phone book memory storage <storage>, which is used by other
phone book commands. Read command returns currently selected
memory, and when supported by manufacturer, number of used
locations and total number of locations in the memory.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set phone book
storage
AT+CPBS=<storage>
[,<password>]
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+CPBS? • +CPBS: <storage>
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CPBS=? • +CPBS: (list of
supported
<storage>s)
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<storage> Description
“FD” Fixed dialled numbers
“EN” Emergency numbers
“ME” ME phone book
“SM” SIM phone book
“DC” ME dialled calls list (30 entries)
“RC” ME received calls list (30 entries)
“MC” ME missed calls list (30 entries)
<passwd> Description
String type Represents the password required when selecting
password protected <storage>s, for example PIN2 for
storage “ME”
12. PHONEBOOK
177
LZT 123 7468 P1A
12.13 AT+CPBW Phonebook Write
Writes phone book entry in location number <index> in the current
phone book memory storage area, selected with AT+CPBS. If the
<number> and <text> parameters are omitted, the entry is deleted. If
<index> is omitted but <number> is included, the entry is written to the
first free location in the phone book.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request phone book
write
AT+CPBW=[<index>]
[, <number>[,<type>
[,<text>]]]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CPBW=? • +CPBW: (list of
supported
<index>s),<nlength>
,(list of supported
<type>s),<tlength>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<index> Description
integer type Values in the range of location numbers of phone book
memory
<number> Description
string type Phone number of format <type>
<type> Description
integer format Type of address octet, default 145 when dialing string
includes international access code character "+",
otherwise 129. (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7)
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
<text> Description
string type Field of maximum length <tlength>;
character set as specified by the select TE character set
command, +CSCS
<nlength> Description
integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <number>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
178
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<tlength> Description
integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
179
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13. Short Message Services - Point to Point
13.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
13.2 AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages
See 6.10, AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages
13.3 AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage
Common for both PDU (Protocol Data Unit) and Text Modes
Selects memory storage <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to be used for
reading, writing, etc. If chosen storage is not appropriate for the ME
(but is supported by the TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is
returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set preferred
message storage
AT+CPMS=<mem1>
[,<mem2>]
[,<mem3>]
•+CPMS:
<used1>,<total1>,<used2>,
<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the command AT+CPMS? • +CPMS:
<mem1>,<used1>,<total1,
<mem2>,<used2>,<total2,
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CPMS=? • +CPMS: (list of supported
<mem1>s),(list of
supported <mem2>s),(list
of supported <mem3>s)
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
180
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Test command returns lists of memory storage supported by the TA.
<mem1> Description
string type Memory from which messages are read and deleted
(commands List Messages +CMGL, Read Message
+CMGR and Delete Message +CMGD)
“ME” ME message storage
“SM” SIM message storage. Default value
<mem2> Description
string type Memory to which writing and sending operations are
made (commands Send Message from Storage +CMSS
and Write Message to Memory +CMGW)
“ME” ME message storage
“SM” SIM message storage
<mem3> Description
string type Memory to which received SMs are preferred to be stored
(unless forwarded directly to TE). Received CBMs are
always stored in “BM” (or some manufacturer specific
storage) unless directly forwarded to TE
“ME” ME message storage
“SM” SIM message storage
<used1>,<used2>,<used3> Description
integer type Total number of messages currently in
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively
<total1>,<total2> ,<total3> Description
integer type Total number of message locations in
<mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> respectively
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
181
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.4 AT+CSCA Service Centre Address
Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated SMs are
transmitted. In text mode, the setting is used by send (+CMGS) and
write (+CMGW) commands. In PDU mode, the setting is used by the
same commands, but only when the length of the SMSC address coded
into <pdu> parameter equals zero. Note that a “+” in front of the number
in <sca> has precedence over the <tosca> parameter, so that a number
starting with “+” will always be treated as an international number.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set service centre
address
AT+CSCA=<sca>
[,<tosca>]
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CSCA? • +CSCA:
<sca>,<tosca>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CSCA=? •OK
•ERROR
<sca> Description
string type GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address Address-Value
field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default
alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the
currently selected TE character set
<tosca> Description
integer type GSM 04.11 (3G TS 24.011) RP SC address type-of-address
octet in integer format
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128-255 Other values refer GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
182
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.5 AT+CMGF Message Format
Common for both PDU and Text Modes
This command tells the TA, which input and output format to use for
messages. The <mode> parameter indicates the format of messages
used with send, list, read and write commands, and unsolicited result
codes resulting from received messages. Mode can be either PDU mode
(entire TP data units used) or text mode (headers and body of the
messages given as separate parameters).
Test command returns supported modes as a compound value.
13.6 AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory
PDU Mode
Stores a message to memory storage <mem2>. Memory location
<index> of the stored message is returned. By default message status
will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but parameter <stat> allows other status
values to be given. ME/TA manufacturer may choose to use different
default <stat> values for different message types. Entering PDU is the
Description Command Possible Responses
Set message format AT+CMGF=<mode> •OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+CMGF? • +CMGF: <mode>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMGF=? • +CMGF: (list of
supported
<mode>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0PDU mode
1 Text mode
Description Command Possible Responses
Write message to
memory
AT+CMGW=<length>
[,<stat>]<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/ESC>
• +CMGW: <index>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMGW=? • OK
•ERROR
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
183
LZT 123 7468 P1A
same as specified by the send message command, +CMGS. If writing
fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. See
“AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage”, page 179.
Text Mode
Stores message (either SMS-DELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) to memory
storage <mem2>. Memory location <index> of the stored message is
returned. By default message status will be set to ‘stored unsent’, but
parameter <stat> allows also other status values to be given. The
entering of text is done as specified in the send message command,
+CMGS. If writing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is
returned.
<stat> Description
2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu> Description
... In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
Description Command Possible Responses
Write message to
memory
AT+CMGW [=<oa/da>
[,<tooa/toda>[,<stat>]]]
<CR>
Text is entered <ctrl-Z/
ESC>
• +CMGW: <index>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMGW=? • OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
184
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Note! SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be stored in
text mode.
<stat> Description
2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
<oa> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <tooa>
<da> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <toda>
<tooa> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<toda> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
185
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.7 AT+CMGS Send Message
PDU Mode
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message
delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is
network support, <ackpdu> is returned. Values can be used to identify
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.
• <length> must indicate the number of octets coded in the TP layer
data unit to be given (i.e. SMSC address octets are excluded).
• The TA shall send a four character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that PDU can be given
from TE to ME/TA.
• The DCD signal is in the ON state as PDU is given.
• The echoing of given characters back from the TA is controlled by
V.25ter echo command E.
• The PDU shall be hexadecimal format (similarly as specified for
<pdu>) and given in one line; ME/TA converts this coding into the
actual octets of PDU.
• When the length octet of the SMSC address (given in the <pdu>)
equals zero, the SMSC address set with command Service Centre
Address +CSCA is used.
• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).
• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of PDU.
Description Command Possible Responses
Send message AT+CMGS=<length>
<CR>
PDU is given<ctrl-Z/
ESC>
•+CMGS:
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMGS=? • OK
•ERROR
<mr> Description
Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
186
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Text Mode
Sends a message from a TE to the network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message
reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message
delivery. Optionally, when AT+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is
network support, <scts> is returned. Values can be used to identify
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code. If sending
fails in a network or an ME error, final result code +CMS ERROR:
<err> is returned. This command is abortable.
• The entered text (GSM 03.40 TP-Data-Unit) is sent to address <da>
and all current settings (refer Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP and
Service Centre Address +CSCA) are used to construct the actual
PDU in the ME/TA.
• The TA shall send a four character sequence
<CR><LF><greater_than><space> (IRA 13, 10, 62, 32) after the
command line is terminated with <CR>; after that text can be
entered from the TE to the ME/TA.
• The DCD signal is in the ON state as text is entered.
• The echoing of entered characters back from the TA is controlled by
V.25ter echo command E.
• The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default
alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-
Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select
TE Character Set +CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the
entered text into GSM alphabet according to rules of Annex
A; backspace can be used to delete last character and
<ackpdu> Description
... GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is
same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11
SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by
double quote characters like a normal string type
parameter
Description Command Possible Responses
Send message AT+CMGS=<da>
[,<toda>] <CR>
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/
ESC>
•+CMGS:
<mr>[,<scts>]
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMGS=? • OK
•ERROR
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
187
LZT 123 7468 P1A
carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every
carriage return entered by the user);
if TE character set is “HEX”: the entered text should consist
of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which
ME/TA converts to 7-bit characters of GSM alphabet (e.g.
17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to character 3 (GSM
23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used
or <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-
Indication is set: the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts into
8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be
converted to an octet with integer value 42).
• Sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27).
• <ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the
message body.
Example
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CSDH=1
OK
AT+CSMP=17,167,0,0
OK
<da> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <toda>
<toda> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<mr> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<mr> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
188
LZT 123 7468 P1A
AT+CMGS=“+447747008670”
> Test SMS
+CMGS: 15
OK
13.8 AT+CMSS Send From Storage
PDU mode
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).
Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message
delivery. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final result code
+CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is abortable. See
“AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage”, page 179.
Text Mode
Sends message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).
Reference value <mr> is returned to the TE on successful message
delivery. Optionally, when +CSMS <service> value is 1 and network
Description Command Possible Responses
Send from storage AT+CMSS=<index> • +CMSS: <mr>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMSS=? • OK
•ERROR
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<mr> Description
Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
Description Command Possible Responses
Send from storage AT+CMSS=<index>
[,<da> [,<toda>]]
• +CMSS: <mr> [,<scts>]
•+CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMSS=? • OK
•ERROR
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
189
LZT 123 7468 P1A
supports, <scts> is returned. If sending fails in a network or an ME
error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This
command is abortable.
13.9 AT+CMGC Send Command
PDU Mode
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-
COMMAND). The entering of PDU is as specified in the send message
command, +CMGS. Message reference value <mr> is returned to the
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<da> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <toda>
<toda> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<scts> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<mr> Description
Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
Description Command Possible Responses
Send command
message
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>
<pdu><ctrl-Z/ESC>
• if PDU mode
(+CMGF=0) and
sending successful:
+CMGC:
<mr>[,<ackpdu>]
• if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGC=? • OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
190
LZT 123 7468 P1A
TE on successful message delivery. Optionally (when +CSMS
<service> value is 1 and network supports) <ackpdu> is returned.
Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited delivery status
report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME error, final
result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This command is
abortable.
Text Mode
Sends a command message from a TE to the network (SMS-
COMMAND). The entering of text is as specified in the send message
command, +CMGS, but the format is fixed to be a sequence of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers, which the ME/TA converts into
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu> Description
String In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
<mr> Description
Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<ackpdu> Description
String GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format is
same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM 04.11
SC address field and parameter shall be bounded by
double quote characters like a normal string type
parameter
Description Command Possible Responses
Send command
message
AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>
[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]
<CR>
Text is entered<ctrl-Z/ESC>
• if PDU mode
(+CMGF=1) and
sending successful:
+CMGC:
<mr>[,<scts>]
• if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
commands is
supported
AT+CMGC=? • OK
•ERROR
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
191
LZT 123 7468 P1A
8-bit octets (refer to +CMGS). Message reference value <mr> is
returned to the TE on successful message delivery. Optionally, when
+CSMS <service> value is 1 and there is network support, <scts> is
returned. Values can be used to identify message upon unsolicited
delivery status report result code. If sending fails in a network or an ME
error, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned. This
command is abortable.
<fo> Description
0First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format
1 First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format
2First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format
3 First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format
<ct> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type. Default value is 0
<pid> Description
0-255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9
<mn> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Number
<da> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <toda>
<toda> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<mr> Description
Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<scts> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer to <dt>)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
192
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.10 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE
PDU Mode
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from
the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal
is ON. If the TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is
carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or
network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set new message
indication to TE
AT+CNMI=[<mode>
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>
]]]]
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+CNMI? • +CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>
•OK
• ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CNMI=? •+CNMI:
(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <mt>s),
(list of supported <bm>s),
(list of supported <ds>s)
•OK
• ERROR
<mode> Description
3Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE
link specific inband technique used to embed result
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
193
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result codes:
+CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDSI: <mem><index>
<mt> Description
0No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the
SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error
message accordingly to GSM 03.38
1 SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the
memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result
code:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
2Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code but not
stored in ME/TA:
+CMT:[<alpha >], <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode
enabled)
Class 2 data coding scheme result in indication as defined
in <mt>=1
3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using
unsolicited result codes +CMT: <length><CR><LF><pdu>.
Class 3 SMS-DELIVER is not stored in ME/TA. Messages of
other data coding schemes result in indication as defined
in <mt>=1
<bm> Description
0Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE
2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited
result code:
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled).
New CBMs are not stored in CBM memory
<ds> Description
0No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE. SMS-STATUS-
REPORT is stored in ME/TA
1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited
result code: +CDS: < length>< CR>< LF>< pdu> (PDU
mode enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA
2SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited
result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (PDU mode enabled).
SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
194
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Text Mode
Selects the procedure for the way in which new messages received from
the network, are indicated to the TE when it is active, e.g. DTR signal
is ON. If TE is inactive (DTR signal is OFF), message receiving is
carried out as specified in GSM 03.38 (3G TS 23.038).
If the command fails and the error is related to mobile equipment or
network, the final result code CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set new message
indication to TE
AT+CNMI=[<mode>
[,<mt>[,<bm>[,<ds>
]]]]
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+CNMI? • +CNMI:
<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>
•OK
• ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CNMI=? •+CNMI:
(list of supported <mode>s),
(list of supported <mt>s),
(list of supported <bm>s),
(list of supported <ds>s)
•OK
• ERROR
<mode> Description
3Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE
link specific inband technique used to embed result
codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<mt> Description
0No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
No class, Class 0, class 1 and class 3 use <mem3> as
preferred storage. Class 2 messages shall be stored in the
SIM. If it this is not possible then the MS shall send an error
message accordingly to GSM 03.38
1 SMS-DELIVER is stored into ME/TA and the indication of the
memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result
code:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
2Class 0, class 1, and class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed
directly to the TE using the unsolicited result code:
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [ ,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data> (text mode
enabled). About parameters in italics, refer to the show
text mode command, +CSDH
3 Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to TE using
unsolicited result codes +CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts> [
,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR>
<LF><data> (Text Mode enabled). About parameters in
italics, refer to the show text mode command, +CSDH.
Messages of other data coding schemes result in
indication as defined in <mt>=1
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
195
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result codes:
+CMT:<oa>, [<alpha>, <scts>
[,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF>
<data> (Text Mode enabled). Refer to the show text mode command,
+CSDH for information on the parameters in italics.
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
+CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
+CDSI: <mem><index>
Example
Display cell broadcast messages:
AT+CNMI=3,0,2,0,0
<bm> Description
0Store message to “BM” (or some manufacturer specific
memory). No CBM indications are routed to the TE
2 New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited
result code:
+CBM:
<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR><LF><data>
(Text mode enabled)
<ds> Description
0No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE
1 SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited
result code: : +CDS:
<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (Text mode
enabled). SMS-STATUS-REPORT is not stored in ME/TA
2SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited
result code: +CDSI: < mem><index> (Text mode enabled).
SMS-STATUS-REPORT is stored in ME/TA
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
196
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.11 AT+CMGR Read Message
PDU Mode
Returns message with location value <index> from preferred message
storage <mem1> to the TE. Status of the message and entire message
data unit <pdu> is returned. If status of the message is ‘received
unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received read’. If reading fails,
final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Read
message
AT+CMGR=
<index>
•+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length>]
<CR><LF><pdu>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGR=? • OK
• ERROR
<stat> Description
0Received unread message (i.e. new message)
1 Received read message
2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3 Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<alpha> Description
String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu> Description
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
197
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Text Mode
Returns messages with location index <index> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer
command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH), If the status of the
message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received
read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Read
message
AT+CMGR=
[<index>]
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-DELIVER:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts>,[<tooa>,
<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-SUBMIT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<da>,[<alpha>],[<toda>,<fo>,
<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],
<scts>,<dt>,<st>
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-COMMAND:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],
[<toda>],<length><CR><LF><cdata>]
• if text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and CBM storage:
+CMGR:
<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,
<pages><CR><LF><data>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGR=? • OK
•ERROR
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by
<mem1>
<stat> Description
0Received unread message (new message)
1 Received read message
2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3 Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
198
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<oa> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <tooa>
<da> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <toda>
<toda> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<tooa> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<tora> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in
integer format (default refer <toda>)
<alpha> Description
String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted, i.e. commas shall mark the place were it should
be. Used character set should be the one selected with
command Select TE Character Set +CSCS
<scts> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
199
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<data>
The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet
according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last
character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return
entered by the user);
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to
character 3 (GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should
consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts
into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an
octet with integer value 42);
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body
<fo> Description
0First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format
1 First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format
2First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format
3 First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format
<mr> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Message_Reference
<ra> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM
default alphabet) are converted to characters of the
currently selected TE character set (refef command
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>
<dt> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/mm/
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz where characters indicate year, month,
day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone
<st> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-status
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
200
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<ct> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP--command-type. Default value is 0
<sn> Description
Integer GSM 03.41 CBM serial number
<mid> Description
String type All different possible combinations of CBM message
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. “0,1,5-7”
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM message identifier in integer format
<page> Description
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 4-7 in integer format
<pages> Description
Integer type GSM 03.41 CBM page parameter bits 0-3 in integer format
<pid> Description
0 - 255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9
<dcs> Description
0 - 255 Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.48. UCS2 and
compressed text not supported
<sca> Description
String type GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted to characters of the currently
selected TE character set
<tosca> Description
Integer type GSM 04.11 RP SC address type-of-address octet in integer
format
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128 - 255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
201
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.12 AT+CMGL List Message
PDU Mode
Note! Returns messages with status value <stat> from preferred message
storage <mem1> to the TE. Entire data units <pdu> are returned. If
status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes
to ‘received read’. If listing fails, final result code +CMS ERROR:
<err> is returned.
<vp> Description
0 - 143 (TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e. 5 minute intervals up to 12 hous)
144 - 167 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)
168 - 196 (TP-VP-166) x 1 day
197 - 255 (TP-VP-192) x 1 week
<mn> Description
Integer type GSM 03.40 TP-message-number
Description Command Possible Responses
List message AT+CMGL [=<stat>] •+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>
<CR><LF><pdu>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length>
<CR><LF><pdu>[…]]
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGL=? • +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
<stat> Description
0Received unread message (i.e. new message)
1 Received read message
2Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3 Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
4All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
202
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<alpha> Description
String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<pdu> Description
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into two IRA character long
hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
203
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Text Mode
Returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. About text mode parameters in Italics, refer
command Show Text Mode Parameters (+CSDH). If the status, of the
message is ‘received unread’, status in the storage changes to ‘received
read’. If listing fails final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
List message AT+CMGL
=[<stat>]
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-SUBMITs and SMS-
DELIVERs:
+CMGL:
<index1>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]
<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index2>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],
[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,<length>]
<CR><LF><data>[…]]
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-STATUS-REPORT:
+CMGL:
<index1>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>, [<ra>],
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> [<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index2>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],
[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>[…]]
•If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct> [<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[…]]
• If text mode (+CMGF=1), command
successful and CBM storage:
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,
<pages>,<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL:
<index>,<stat>,<sn>,<mid>,<page>,
<pages><CR><LF> <data>[…]]
• Otherwise:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Read the
current
setting
•+CMGL:<stat>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
Test if the
command is
supported
AT+CMGL=? • +CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s)
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by
<mem1>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
204
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<stat> Description
Integer Indicates the status of messages in memory
0 Received unread message (new message)
1Received read message
2 Stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
3Stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
4 All messages (only applicable to +CMGL command)
<oa> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <tooa>
<da> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Value in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted to characters of the currently selected TE
character (refer command +CSCS). Type of address given
by <toda>
<toda> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Destination- Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is +(IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129
<tooa> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<tora> Description
String type GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in
integer format (default refer <toda>)
<alpha> Description
String type Manufacturing specific. Should be left empty but not
omitted i.e.
commas shall mark the place were it should be. Used
character set should be the one selected with command
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
205
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<scts> Description
String type GSM 03.40 TP-service-centre-time-stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<length> Description
Integer type Value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the length of
the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer SMSC
address octets are not counted in the length)
<data>
The entered text should be formatted as follows:
if <dcs> (set with +CSMP) indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and
<fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
if TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS in TS 07.07): ME/TA converts the entered text into GSM alphabet
according to rules of Annex A; backspace can be used to delete last
character and carriage returns can be used (previously mentioned four
character sequence shall be sent to the TE after every carriage return
entered by the user);
if TE character set is "HEX": the entered text should consist of two IRA
character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts to 7-bit
characters of GSM alphabet (e.g. 17 (IRA 49 and 55) will be converted to
character 3 (GSM 23));
if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used or <fo> indicates
that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set: the entered text should
consist of two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers which ME/TA converts
into 8-bit octet (e.g. two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65) will be converted to an
octet with integer value 42);
sending can be cancelled by giving <ESC> character (IRA 27)
<ctrl-Z> (IRA 26) must be used to indicate the ending of the message body
<fo> Description
0First octet of SMS-DELIVER in integer format
1 First octet of SMS_SUBMIT in integer format
2First octet of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in integer format
3 First octet of SMS-COMMAND in integer format
<mr> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference
<ra> Description
String GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address-Value field. BCD (or GSM
default alphabet) are converted to characters of the
currently selected TE character set (refef command
+CSCS. Type of address given by <tosca>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
206
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Example
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGL=?
+CMGL: “REC UNREAD”,“REC READ”,“STO UNSENT”,“STO
SENT”,“ALL”
OK
<dt> Description
String GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in string format "yy/MM/
dd,hh:mm:ss+-zz where characters indicate year, month,
day, hour,minutes, seconds and time zone
<st> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Status
<ct> Description
Integer GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type (default 0)
<sn> Description
Integer GSM 03.41 CBM Serial Number
<mid> Description
String type All different possible combinations of CBM message
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. "0,1,5-7"
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer
format
<page> Description
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 4-7 in integer format
<pages> Description
Integer format GSM 03.41 CBM Page Parameter bits 0-3 in integer format
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
207
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.13 AT+CMGD Delete Message
Common for both PDU and Text modes
Deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location
<index>. If deleting fails, final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is
returned. Test command shows the valid memory locations.
13.14 AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters
Only Applicable to Text Mode
Controls whether detailed header information is shown in text mode
result codes.
Description Command Possible Responses
Delete message AT+CMGD=<index> • +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CMGD=? • OK
•ERROR
<index> Description
Integer type Value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
Description Command Possible Responses
Set the show text
mode
AT+CSDH=[<show>] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
Display current settings AT+CSDH? • +CSDH: <show>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CSDH=? • +CSDH: (list of
supported <show>s)
•OK
• +CME ERROR: <err>
<show> Description
0Do not show header values defined in commands
AT+CSCA and AT+CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>,
<pid> and <dcs>) nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in
+CMT, +CMGL, +CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and
SMS-SUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in +CMGR
result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,
<length> or <cdata>
1 Show the values in result codes
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
208
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.15 AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters
Only Applicable to Text Mode
Used to select values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent
to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is
selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the
SM is received by the SMSC (<vp> is in range 0… 255). The <pid>
parameter identifies the higher protocol being used or indicates
interworking with a certain type of telematic service and <dcs>
determines the way the information is encoded as in GSM 03.38.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set the text mode
parameters
AT+CSMP=[<fo
> [,<vp>[,<pid>
[,<dcs>]]]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Display current
settings
AT+CSMP? • +CSMP: <fo>,<vp>,<pid>,<dcs>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CSMP=? • +CSMP: (List of supported <fo>s),
(list of supported <vp>s), (list of
supported <pid>s), (list of
supported <dcs>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<fo> Description
0-255 Depending on the command or result code: first octet of
GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default value
17),SMS-STATUS-REPORT, or SMS-COMMAND (default value
2) in integer format
<vp> Description
0-143 (TP-VP+1) x 5 minutes (i.e 5 minutes intervals up to 12 hous)
144-167 12 hours + ((TP_VP-143) x 30 minutes)
168-196 (TP-VP-166) x 1 day
197-255 (TP-VP-192) x 1 week
<pid> Description
0-255 Protocol Identifier in integer format. Default value is 0,
according to 07.05 section 9.2.3.9
<dcs> Description
0-255 Data coding scheme. See GSM 03.38. UCS2 and
compressed text not supported
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
209
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.16 AT+CSCS Select Character Set
This command informs the TA which character set <chset> is used by
the TE. The TA is then able to convert character strings correctly
between TE and ME character sets.
When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and the used TE alphabet
is 7-bit, the highest bit shall be set to zero.
Note! How the internal alphabet of ME is converted to, or from, the TE
alphabet is manufacturer specific.
Read command shows current setting and test command display
conversion schemes implemented in the TA.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set command informs
TA which character set
is used by the TE
AT+CSCS=<chset> •OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT+CSCS? • +CSCS: <chset>
•OK
•ERROR
Show list of supported
character sets
AT+CSCS=? • +CSCS: (list of
supported <chset>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<chset> Description
“GSM” GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1).
Default value
“IRA” International reference alphabet (ITU-T T.50). Note:
recommended default value by GSM 07.07.
“8859-n” ISO 8859 Latin n (1-6) character set
“UTF8” Universal text format, 8 bits
“ERICSSON” Unicode, 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character
set (ISO/IEC10646)
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
210
LZT 123 7468 P1A
13.17 AT+CSMS Select Message Service
Common for both PDU and Text Modes
Selects messaging service <service>. It returns the types of messages
supported by the ME: <mt> for mobile terminated messages, <mo> for
mobile originated messages and <bm> for broadcast type messages. If
the chosen service is not supported by the ME (but is supported by the
TA), final result code +CMS ERROR: <err> is returned.
Description Command Possible Responses
Select message
service
AT+CSMS=<service> •+CSMS:
<mt>,<mo>,<bm>
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show supported
message types along
with the current
service setting
AT+CSMS? • +CSMS:
<service>,<mt>,<mo>,
<bm>
•OK
•ERROR
Show list of supported
services
AT+CSMS=? • +CSMS: (list of
supported <service>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<service> Description
0GSM 03.40 and 03.41. The syntax of SMS AT commands is
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+
features which do not require new command syntax may
be supported (e.g. correct routing of messages with new
Phase 2+ data coding schemes)
2..127 Reserved
<mt> Description
0Mobile terminated messages not supported
1 Mobile terminated messages supported
<mo> Description
0Mobile originated messages not supported
1 Mobile originated messages supported
<bm> Description
0Broadcast messages not supported
1 Broadcast messages supported
13. SHORT MESSAGE SERVICES - POINT TO POINT
211
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<err> Description
0...127 GSM 04.11 Annex E-2 values
128...255 GSM 03.40 subclause 9.2.3.22 values
300 ME failure
302 Operation not allowed
304 Invalid PDU mode parameter
310 SIM not inserted
311 SIM PIN required
312 PH-SIM PIN required
313 SIM failure
314 SIM busy
315 SIM wrong
316 SIM PUK required
317 SIM PIN2 required
318 SIM PUK2 required
500 Unknown error
...511 Other values in range 256...511 are reserved
512... Manufacturer specific
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
212
LZT 123 7468 P1A
213
LZT 123 7468 P1A
14. Short Message Services - Cell Broadcast
14.1 AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE
See 13.10, AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE
14.2 AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type
Common for both PDU and text modes
Selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME.
Description Command Possible Responses
Select cell broadcast
message type
AT+CSCB=[<mode>
[,<mids>]]
• +CMS ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Shows the current
setting
AT+CSCB? • +CSCB:
<mode>,<mids>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CSCB=? • +CSCB: (list of
supported
<mode>s)
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Message types in <mids> and <dcss> are accepted
<mids> Description
string type All different possible combinations of CBM message
identifiers (refer <mid>) (default is empty string);
e.g. “0,1,5-7”
<mid> GSM 03.41 CBM Message Identifier in integer
format
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
214
LZT 123 7468 P1A
215
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15. SIM Application Toolkit
15.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
15.2 AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings
Allows the external application to disable or enable the presentation of
the unsolicited result codes corresponding to the STK commands.
Parameter <on_off> is used to disable or enable the presentation of an
unsolicited result code *E2STK. Setting chosen is stored internally so
that it is not necessary to change it each time the ME is switched on.
If the presentation of the unsolicited result codes is disabled, the
messages below are not sent to the application.
The unsolicited result codes shall be disabled by default.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
The unsolicited result codes defined in sections below can be received.
Description Command Possible responses
Set the presentation of
the unsolicited result
codes corresponding to
STK
AT*E2STKS=<on_off> • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current status of
the presentation of the
unsolicited result codes
AT*E2STKS? • *E2STKS: <on_off>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*E2STKS=? • *E2STKD: list of
supported <on_off>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<on_off> Description
0Disable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes
related to STK. Default value
1 Enable the presentation of the unsolicited result codes
related to STK
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
216
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15.3 AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text
The ME passes the parameters within DISPLAY TEXT command to
the external application by means of the unsolicited result code
*E2STKD.
Command AT*E2STKD allows the external application to send the
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and
before the timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR
response is generated.
Test command returns the list of supported <answer>. Values follow
GSM 11.14 standard
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKD: <priority>,<clear_condition>,<coding>,<text_length>,
<text>
Description Command Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of
DISPLAY TEXT
AT*E2STKD=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKD=? • *E2STKD:
(list of supported <answer>)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<answer> Description
0OK.
Performed as required: the text was displayed and
cleared as requested. It corresponds to ‘00’ Command
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard
1 Failed.
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to end the proactive
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session terminated
by the user, described in the GSM standard
2Failed.
User requests backwards move: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the
session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in the
proactive SIM session requested by the user
3 Failed.
No response from user: the text was displayed, and
although the clear condition was “Wait for user to clear”,
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response
from user
4Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
217
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
15.4 AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey
The ME passes the parameters within GET INKEY command to the
external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKG.
The external application then sends AT*E2STKG with the user
response.
<priority> Description
0Display normal priority text
1 Display high priority text
<clear_condition> Description
0Clear message after a dalay
1 Wait for user to clear message
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit
GSM default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integter type Value indicating the maximum length of field <text>
<text> Description
string type Field of maximum length <text_length>, in string type
format between "". Coding is defined in <coding>
Description Command Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of
GET INKEY
AT*E2STKG =<answer>,
[<response_type>,
<user_response>]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKG=? • *E2STKG:
(list of supported <answer>),
(list of supported
<response_type>),
<user_response>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
218
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Answer command allows the external application to send the
appropriate answer, after receiving the unsolicited result code, and
before the timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR
response is generated.
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates
ERROR.
Test command returns the list of supported values, and the maximum
value of <prompt_text_length>.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKG: <coding>,<prompt_text_length>,<prompt_text>
<answer> Description
0OK.
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It
corresponds to ‘00’ Command performed successfully,
described in the GSM standard
1 Failed.
User Terminated Session: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to end the proactive
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive session
terminated by the user, described in the GSM standard
2Failed.
User requests backward move: the text was displayed
as requested and the user wants to go backwards in
the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ Backward move in
the proactive SIM session requested by the user
3 Failed.
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the
user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response
from user
4Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<response_type> Description
0Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)
1 Response type shall be SMS default alphabet
3Response type shall be “Yes/No” response
<user_response> Description
String type Field of 1 to 2 bytes length in string type format
between “”. Coding is defined in <response_type>.
Length shall be 2 bytes when coding is UCS2 .
Otherwise it shall be 1 byte
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
219
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
15.5 AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input
The ME passes the parameters within GET INPUT command to the
external application by means of the unsolicited result code E2STKI.
The external application sends AT*E2STKI with the user response.
AT*E2STKI allows the external application to send the appropriate
answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and before the
timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR
response is generated.
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates
ERROR.
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38
with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as
defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 7 bit GSM default alphabet
<prompt_text_length> Description
Integer type (0-235) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<prompt_text>
<prompt_text> Description
String type Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>, in
string type format between “”. Coding is defined in
<prompt_coding>.
Description Command Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of GET
INPUT
AT*E2STKI=<answer>,
[<response_type>,
<response_length>,
<user_response>]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKI=? • *E2STKI: (list of supported
<answer>),(list of supported
<response_type>),
<response_length>,
<user_response>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
220
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Test command returns the list of suported values, and
<prompt_text_length>.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
Note! If <response_type>=3 (Yes/No), the length of <user_response> is
1 byte. Otherwise, the ME gives an ERROR message.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKI: <min_length_response>,<max_length_response>,
<echo_input>,<prompt_coding>,<prompt_text_length>,
<prompt_text>
<answer> Description
0OK.
Performed as required: the text was displayed. It corresponds
to ‘00’ command performed succesfully, described in the GSM
standard
1 Failed.
User terminated session: the text was displayed as requested
and the user wants to end the proactive session. It corresponds
to ‘10’ proactive session terminated by the user, described in
the GSM standard
2Failed.
User requests backward move: the text was displayed as
requested and the user wants to go backwards in the session.
It corresponds to ‘11’ backward move in the proactive SIM
session requested by the user
3 Failed.
No response from user: the text was displayed, and the user
did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ No response from user
4Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<response_type> Description
0Response type shall be digits (0-9, *, # and +)
1 Response type shall be SMS default alphabet
3Response type shall be “Yes/No” response
<response_length> Description
Integer type (0-160) Value indicating the length of response field
<user_response>. It shall be an integer within the
range between <min_length_response> and
<max_length_response>
<user_response> Description
String type Field of length between <min_length_response> and
<max_length_response>, in string type format between
"". Coding is defined in <response_type>.
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
221
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<min_length_response> Description
Integer type (0-160) Value indicating the minimum length of
response field <user_response>
<max_length_response> Description
Integer type (0-160) Value indicating the maximum length of
response field <user_response>
<echo_input> Description
0The user input shall be echoed
1 The user input shall be hidden
<prompt_coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS
default 7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in
GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It corresponds to
data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS
default 7-bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit
octets, as defined in GSM 03.38. It corresponds
to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM default
alphabet
2Text is coded in UCS2 alphabet, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding
scheme of 16 bit UCS2 alphabet
<prompt_text_length> Description
Integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field
<prompt_text>
<prompt_text> Description
String type Field of maximum length <prompt_text_length>,
in string type between “”. Coding is defined in
<prompt_coding>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
222
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15.6 AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item
The ME passes the parameters within SELECT ITEM command to the
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKL.
Command AT*E2STKL allows the external application to send the
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and
before the timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR
response is be generated.
If <answer> parameter is not 0, a failure has occurred and no more
parameters are sent. If the extra parameters are sent, the ME indicates
ERROR.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
Description Command Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of
SELECT ITEM
AT*E2STKL=<answer>,
[<user_response>]
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKL=? • *E2STKL: (list of supported
<answer>),
(list of supported
<user_response>)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<answer> Description
0OK.
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard
1 Failed.
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM
standard
2Failed.
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’
Backward move in the proactive SIM session requested
by the user
3 Failed.
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no
response from user
4Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
<user_response> Description
integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It
identifies the selected <item_idn> within the items list
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
223
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result Codes:
E2STKL: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,<alpha_id>
[,<default>]<CR><LF>E2STKL: <item_id1>,<coding>,
<text_length>,<item1><CR><LF>[…]E2STKL: <item_idn>,
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn><CR><LF>]
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
The maximum length is fixed
The maximum length is fixed.
<coding> Description
0 Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default
7-bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8
set to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined
in GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of
7 bit GSM default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integer type
(0-240)
Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>, <itemn1>,.<Itemn>
<alpha_id> Description
String type Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<default> Description
Integer type The <default> parameter is a single byte between 1 and
255. It shows the default/selected item within the list
<item_idn> Description
Integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer
<item_idn>
<itemn> Description
String type Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<NbrOfItems> Description
Integer type Number of items to be presented in the following
unsolicited results
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
224
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15.7 AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP MENU command to the
external application, so that the STK menu can be built externally, by
means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKM.
The current menu can be removed by sending only the parameter
<on_off> = 0.
Answer command allows the external application to send the
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and
before the timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR
response is generated.
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
Description Command Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of SET
UP MENU
AT*E2STKM=<answer>,
<on_off>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKM=? • *E2STKM: (list of supported
<answer>),(list of supported
<on_off>)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
<answer> Description
0OK.
Performed as required: it corresponds to ‘00’ command
performed successfully, described in the GSM standard
1 Failed.
User Terminated Session: the command was executed as
requested and the user wants to end the proactive
session. It corresponds to ‘10’ proactive session terminated
by the user, described in the GSM standard
2Failed.
User requests backwards move: the command was
executed as requested and the user wants to go
backwards in the session. It corresponds to ‘11’ backward
move in the proactive SIM session requested by the user
3 Failed.
No response from user: the command was executed, and
the user did not react. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response
from user
4Failed.
Screen is busy
5 Failed.
Command beyond MEs capability. It corresponds to ‘30’.
It was not possible to successfully integrate or remove the
list of menu items
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
225
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKM: <NbrOfItems>,<coding>,<text_length>,
<alpha_id><CR><LF>E2STKM: <item_id1>,<coding>,
<text_length>,<item1>[<CR><LF>[…]E2STKM: <item_idn>,
<coding>,<text_length>,<itemn>]
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
The maximum length is fixed.
The maximum length is fixed.
<on_off> Description
0Remove the current menu
1 New menu to be displayed
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit
GSM default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integer type Value indicating the maximum length of field <alpha_id>,
<itemn1>, <Itemn>
<alpha_id> Description
String type Field of string type between "". Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<item_idn> Description
Integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. Each
item <itemn> in the list shall have a unique identifer
<item_idn>
<itemn> Description
String type Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<NbrOfltems> Description
Integer type Number of Items to be presented in the following
unsolicited results
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
226
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The parameters have no default values.
15.8 AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection)
The application informs the ME about the selected menu item by means
of the AT*E2SKTN command. The ME answers with OK, or ERROR.
The Do command allows the external application to select the menu
item in the item list that was created by means of the SET-UP MENU
command.
15.9 AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call
The ME passes the parameters within SET UP CALL command to the
external application by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKC,
so that it takes up the decision on progressing or rejecting the call.
Answer command allows the external application to send the
appropriate answer after receiving the unsolicited result code, and
before the timeout expires.
If Answer command is sent once the timeout expires, an ERROR
response is generated.
Description Command Possible responses
Do the menu
selection
AT*E2STKN=<sel_item> • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKN=? • *E2STKN: (list of supported
<sel_item>)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<sel_item> Description
Integer type The identifier is a single byte between 1 and 255. It
identifies the selected menu item corresponding to SET-UP
MENU command. Values follow the definition described in
GSM 11.14
Description Command Possible responses
Answer to the
reception of SET UP
CALL
AT*E2STKC=<answer> • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the
command is
supported
AT*E2STKC=? • *E2STKC: (list of supported
<answer>)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
227
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*E2STKC: <ton>,<dial_string>,<SetUpRequirement>,<coding>,
<text_length>,<alpha_id>
Values follow GSM 11.14 standard.
<answer> Description
0OK.
Performed as required. It corresponds to ‘00’ command
performed succesfully, described in the GSM standard
1 Failed.
User terminated session. It corresponds to ‘10’ Proactive
session terminated by the user, described in the GSM
standard
2Failed.
User requests backwards move. It corresponds to ‘11’
backward move in the proactive SIM session requested by
the user
3 Failed.
No response from user. It corresponds to ‘12’ no response
from user
4Failed.
Screen is busy: the text could not be displayed
6 Failed.
User rejected call set-up request. It corresponds to ‘22’
7Failed.
User cleared down call before connection or network
release. It corresponds to ‘23’
<ton> Description
Integer type Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as
for EFAND. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed
values
<dial_string> Description
String type Phone number of format <ton>
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit
GSM default alphabet
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
228
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The maximum length is fixed
15.10 *E2STKE STK Send Short Message
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKE: <coding>, < text_length >, <alpha_id>
The ME passes the <alpha_id> within SEND SHORT MESSAGE
command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result
code *E2STKE. This informs the external application that the ME is
sending an SMS.
The maximum length is fixed.
<text_length> Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id> Description
String type Field of string type between “”. Coding is according to
EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set to 0. It
corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in GSM
03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7 bit GSM
default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id> Description
String type Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
‘FF’ In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’
to indicate “Sending SMS”, so that the external
application is informed
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
229
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15.11 *E2STKP STK Send SS
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKP: <ton>, <SS_string>, <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>,
<SS_return>
The ME passes the parameters within SEND SS command to the
external application, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKP.
This informs the external application that the ME has sent an SS string
to the network, and provides the current status after this operation.
The maximum length is fixed.
<ton> Description
integer type Field of 1 byte indicating the Type of Number, coded as
for EFAND. See GSM 04-08, section 10.5.4.7 for the allowed
values
<SS_string> Description
String type SS string of format <ton>
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit
GSM default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id> Description
String type Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
‘FF’ In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’
to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application
is informed
<SS_return> Description
Integer type Field of 1 byte indicating the SS Return Result Operation
code, as defined in GSM 04.80, so that the external
application is informed about the result of the SS
operation
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
230
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15.12 *E2STKU STK Send USSD
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKU: <coding>, <text_length>, <alpha_id>
Description:
The ME shall passes the <alpha_id> parameter within SEND USSD
command to the external application, by means of the unsolicited result
code *E2STKU. This informs the external application that the ME is
sending a USSD string to the network.
The maximum length is fixed.
<coding> Description
0Text is coded in unpacked format, using the SMS default 7-
bit coded alphabet, as defined in GSM 03.38 with bit 8 set
to 0. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 8 bit
1 Text is coded in packed format, using the SMS default 7-bit
coded alphabet, packed in 8-bit octets, as defined in
GSM 03.38. It corresponds to data coding scheme of 7-bit
GSM default alphabet
<text_length> Description
Integer type (0-240) Value indicating the maximum length of field
<alpha_id>
<alpha_id> Description
String type Field of string type format between “”. Coding is
according to EFAND as defined in GSM 11.11
‘FF’ In case that the SIM does not provide the optional alpha
identifier, or this is a null data object, the ME shall give ‘FF’
to indicate “SS string sent” so that the external application
is informed
15. SIM APPLICATION TOOLKIT
231
LZT 123 7468 P1A
15.13 *E2STKR STK Refresh
Unsolicited Result Code:
*E2STKR: <indicator>
The ME informs the external application about the coming REFRESH
command, by means of the unsolicited result code *E2STKR (eg Reset
is coming).
15.14 AT*E2STKTO SIM Application Toolkit Settings
Parameter Command Syntax:
AT*E2STKTO = <Command>, <timer>
This command allows the external application to configure some
general settings related to STK.
Defined values:
Parameter <Command> is used to define the command that the time
parameter is going to be applied.
Parameter <timer> is used to fix the timeout period applicable to
Proactive SIM mechanism.
<indicator> Description
Integer type Indicator describes the mode that the SIM has requested
when sending a REFRESH command
0 SIM initialization and full file change notification
1File change notification
2 SIM initialization and file change notification
3SIM initialization
4SIM reset
<Command> Description
Integer type (0-6) It defines the command that the time parameter is
going to be applied
0 All the commands with timeout associated are set
to the value of <timer>
1Set Up Menu command timeout is set to the value
of <timer>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
232
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited result code:
*E2STKTO: <command>
2 Set Up Call command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
3Display Text command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
4 Get Input command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
5Select Item command timeout is set to the value of
<timer>
<timer> Description
Integer type (0-99) Specifies the value in seconds to be set in the
timeout associated with the command specified in
<command>
0 All the commands timeouts are set to its default
value
(1-99) The timeout of the command specified in
<command> is set to this value
<Command> Description
233
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16. Supplementary Services
16.1 AT+CPIN PIN Control
See 3.23, AT+CPIN PIN Control
16.2 AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter
Resets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter value in
SIM file EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both
the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is usually required to reset
the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is
returned. See “+CME ERROR (Mobile Equipment Error Code)”, page
55.
Note! This command must take into account what line is chosen with
AT*ELIN.
Read command returns the current value of ACM.
Description Command Possible Responses
Reset the ACM
(Accumulated Call
Meter) value on the
SIM
AT+CACM=[<passwd>] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current value AT+CACM? • +CACM: <acm>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Tests if the command is
supported
AT+CACM=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<passwd> Description
String type SIM-PIN2
<acm> Description
String type Accumulated call meter value similarly coded as <ccm>
under +CAOC
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
234
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.3 AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum
Sets the Advice of Charge related accumulated call meter maximum
value in SIM file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number
of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber. When ACM
(refer +CACM) reaches ACMmax calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is
usually required to set the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME
ERROR: <err> is returned.
Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set command sets the
Advice of Charge
related accumulated
call meter maximum
value in SIM file
EFACMmax
AT+CAMM=[<acmmax>
[,<passwd>]]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
value
AT+CAMM? • +CAMM:
<acmmax>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command if
supported
AT+CAMM=? • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<acmmax> Description
String type Accumulated call meter maximum value similarly coded
as <ccm> under +CAOC; value zero disables ACMmax
feature
<passwd> Description
String type SIM PIN2
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
235
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.4 AT+CAOC Advice of Charge
Use of Advice of Charge supplementary service command enables the
subscriber to get information about the cost of calls. With <mode>=0,
the execute command returns the current call meter value from the ME.
The command also includes the possibility to enable an unsolicited
event reporting of the CCM information. The unsolicited result code
+CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes, but no more than
every 10 seconds. Deactivation of the unsolicited event reporting is
made with the same command.
Read command indicates whether the unsolicited reporting is activated
or not. Read command is available when the unsolicited result code is
supported.
It is recommended (although optional) that the test command return the
supported mode values.
Description Command Possible Responses
Execute command AT+CAOC[=<mode>] • [+CAOC: <ccm>]
+CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read command,
shows the current
mode
AT+CAOC? • +CAOC: <mode>
•OK
•ERROR
Test command, shows
if the command is
supported
AT+CAOC=? • [+CAOC: (list of
supported
<mode>s]
•OK
•ERROR
<mode> Description
0Query CCM value
1 Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
2Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
<ccm> Description
String type Three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal
format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); value is
in home units and bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax
value in the SIM
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
236
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.5 AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table
Sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit and
currency table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to
convert the home units (as used in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM)
into currency units. SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2 (depending on which SIM
card that is used) is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in an
ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
Read command returns the current parameters of PUCT.
For information on the character set see AT+CSCS in the Short
Message Services section.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set command sets the
parameters of Advice
of Charge related
price per unit and
currency table in SIM
file EFPUCT
AT+CPUC=<currency>,
<ppu>[,<passwd>]
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Shows the current
values
AT+CPUC? • +CPUC:
<currency>,<ppu>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Shows if the command
is supported
AT+CPUC=? •OK
•ERROR
<currency> Description
String Alpha-identifier of the currency code (3 characters, e.g.
SEK)
<ppu> Description
String type price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.
“2.66”)
<passwd> Description
String type SIM PIN1 or SIM PIN2
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
237
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.6 AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function
This command enables and disables notification of divert status changes
with the unsolicited result code *EDIF.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*EDIF: <reason>,<status>,<classx>[,<number>,<type>]
Description Command Possible Responses
Enable and disable
notification with the
unsolicited result code
*EDIF
AT*EDIF=<onoff> • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the current
setting
AT*EDIF? • *EDIF: <onoff>
+CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT*EDIF=? • *EDIF: (list of
supported <onoff>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<onoff> Description
0Disable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF
1 Enable notification with the unsolicited result code *EDIF
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
238
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.7 AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set
This command enables or disables the presentation of the alpha tag of
the Caller ID and Called ID to the TE if the ID is recognized. The alpha
tag is the first name and the last name. The presentation is done by an
unsolicited result code, *ELIP for Caller ID and *EOLP for Called ID.
Unsolicited Result Codes:
*ELIP:<alpha tag>
*EOLP:<alpha tag>
Description Command Possible Responses
Sets the alpha tag to
be displayed in the ME
AT*EIPS=<ID>,
<alphatag mode>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT*EIPS? • *EIPS: <ID1>,<alphatag
mode1><CR><LF>
*EIPS: <ID2>,<alphatag
mode2><CR><LF>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported and list the
possible settings
AT*EIPS=? • *EIPS: (list of supported
ID>s),(list of supported
<alphatag mode>s)
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<ID> Description
1Caller ID (*ELIP)
2 Called ID (*EOLP)
<alphatag mode> Description
0Off
1 First name and last name displayed
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
239
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.8 AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set
This command requests the ME to set the current line to <line>.
Note! The following command reads its value from the current line and is thus
affected by the use of *ELIN:
AT+CACM - Accumulated Call Meter
16.9 AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch
This command allows the user to send a Public MMI command string
in order to activate, deactivate, interrogate or modify settings for
Supplementary Services.
Once a string is sent, the command will return OK if parsed and sent
successfully, otherwise ERROR is returned. The command does not
verify that the operation executes successfully - use the AT*E2SSI
command to gain feedback of the operation status.
Description Command Possible Responses
Set the current line to
<line>
AT*ELIN=<line> •*ELIN: <line>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current line AT*ELIN? • *ELIN: <line>
• +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT*ELIN=? • *ELIN: list of
supported <line>s
+CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<line> Description
1L1
2L2
Description Command Possible Responses
Send Supplementary
Service command
AT*E2SSD=<SS_String> •OK
•ERROR
Shows if the command
is supported
AT*E2SSD=? • OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
240
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Refer to GSM 02.30 for Public MMI services and codes.
16.10 AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications
This command allows the user to display the unsolicited response code
*E2SSI on network responses (either command confirmation or error
responses) for Supplementary Services. This can be used in conjunction
with the AT+CSSN command which gives responses on the network
notification of SS status.
The default setting is OFF, where responses are disabled.
Unsolicited Result codes:
*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,
<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<ForwardedToNr>],
[<NoReplyConditionTime>], [<CLI_RestrictionOption>]]]
or
*E2SSI: <errorcode>[,<Opcode>[,<SS_Code>,[<BasicServChoice>,
<BasicServValue>],[<SS_Status>],[<SubscriptionOption>]]]
<SS_String> Description
String Type String in double quotes, containing a Public MMI
command to modify, activate, interrogate or deactivate
a Supplementary Service. String can contain values
‘0-9’, ‘*’ and ‘#’
Description Command Possible Responses
Set Supplementary
Service indications
AT*E2SSI=<op> •ERROR
•OK
Displays current
settings
AT*E2SSI? *E2SSI: <op>
Shows if the command
is supported
AT*E2SSI=? • *E2SSI: (list of
supported <op>s)
•ERROR
<op> Description
0Disable *E2SSI indications. Default value
1 Enable *E2SSI indications
<errorcode> Description
0OK (no error)
1 SSI_PASSWORD_ERROR
2SSI_TOO_MANY_PARTS
3 SSI_COMMAND_ERROR
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
241
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4SSI_SIM_ERROR
5SSI_NUMBER_ERR
6SSI_CALL_BARRED
7 SSI_NOT_AVAILABLE
8SSI_UNSUCCESSFUL
9 SSI_NOT_ALLOWED
10 SSI_NETWORK_PROBLEM
<Opcode> Description
10 REGISTER_SS
11 ERASE_SS
12 ACTIVATE_SS
13 DEACTIVATE_SS
14 INTERROGATE_SS
<SScode> Description
0ALL_SS
16 ALL_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_SERVICES
17 CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION
18 CALLING_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION
19 CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_PRESENTATION
20 CONNECTED_LINE_IDENTIFICATION_RESTRICTION
21 MALICIOUS_CALL_IDENTIFICATION
32 ALL_FORWARDING_SERVICES
33 CALL_FORWARDING_UNCONDITIONAL
40 ALL_CONDITIONAL_FORWARDING_SERVICES
41 CALL_FORWARDING_ON_MOBILE_SUBSCRIBER_BUSY
42 CALL_FORWARDING_ON_NO_REPLY
43 CALL_FORWARDING_ON_SUBSCRIBER_NOT_REACHABLE
49 EXPLICIT_CALL_TRANSFER
64 ALL_CALL_COMPLETION_SERVICES
65 CALL_WAITING
66 CALL_HOLD
67 COMPLETION_OF_CALL_TO_BUSY_SUBSCRIBER
<errorcode> Description
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
242
LZT 123 7468 P1A
81 MULTI_PARTY
112 ALL_CHARGING_SS
113 ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_INFORMATION
114 ADVICE_OF_CHARGE_CHARGING
144 ALL_BARRING_SERVICES
145 BARRING_OF_OUTGOING_CALLS
146 BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_CALLS
147 BARRING_OF_ALL_OUTGOING_INTERNATIONAL_CALLS
148 BARRING_OF_ALL_OG_INTERNATIONAL_NON_HPLMN_
DIRECTED_CALLS
153 BARRING_OF_INCOMING_CALLS
154 BARRING_OF_ALL_INCOMING_CALLS
155 BARRING_OF_ALL_IC_CALLS_WHEN_OUTSIDE_HPLMN
<BasicServChoice> Description
2BEARER_SERVICE
3 TELE_SERVICE
<SScode> Description
<BasicServValue> Description
<TELE_SERVICE> <BEARER_SERVICE>
0TS_ALL_TELE_SERVICES BS_ALL_BEARER_SERVICES
16 TS_SPEECH BS_ALL_DATA_CDA_SERVICES
17 TS_TELEPHONY BS_DATA_CDA_300BPS
18 TS_EMERGENCY_CALLS BS_DATA_CDA_1200BPS
20 BS_DATA_CDA_2400BPS
21 BS_DATA_CDA_4800BPS
22 BS_DATA_CDA_9600BPS
24 BS_ALL_DATA_CDS_SERVICES
25 BS_DATA_CDS_300BPS
26 BS_DATA_CDS_1200BPS
28 BS_DATA_CDS_2400BPS
29 BS_DATA_CDS_4800BPS
30 BS_DATA_CDS_9600BPS
32 TS_ALL_SHORT_MESSAGE_SERVICES BS_ALL_PAD_ACCESS_CA_SERVICES
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
243
LZT 123 7468 P1A
33 TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MT_PP BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_300BPS
34 TS_SHORT_MESSAGE_MO_PP BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200BPS
35 BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_1200_75BPS
36 BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_2400BPS
37 BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_4800BPS
38 BS_PAD_ACCESS_CA_9600BPS
40 BS_ALL_DATA_PDS_SERVICES
44 BS_DATA_PDS_2400BPS
45 BS_DATA_PDS_4800BPS
46 BS_DATA_PDS_9600BPS
48 BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDA
56 BS_ALL_ALTERNATE_SPEECH_DATA_CDS
64 TS_VIDEOTEX BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDA
72 BS_ALL_SPEECH_FOLLOWED_BY_DATA_CDS
80 TS_TELETEX BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_ASYNCHRONOUS
88 BS_ALL_DATA_CIRCUIT_SYNCHRONOUS
96 TS_ALL_FAX_SERVICES BS_ALL_ASYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES
97 TS_FAX_GROUP3_ALTER_SPEECH
98 TS_AUTOMATIC_FAX_GROUP3
99 TS_FAX_GROUP4
104 BS_ALL_SYNCHRONOUS_SERVICES
112 TS_ALL_DATA_SERVICES
120 BS_12_KBIT_UNRESTRICTED_DIGITAL
128 TS_ALL_TELESERVICES_EXCEPT_SMS
208 TS_AUXILIARY_SPEECH
209 TS_AUXILIARY_TELEPHONY
<BasicServValue> Description
<TELE_SERVICE> <BEARER_SERVICE>
<SS_Status> Description
0NO_FLAG_SET
1 SS_STATUS_ACTIVE
2SS_STATUS_REGISTERED
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
244
LZT 123 7468 P1A
4 SS_STATUS_PROVISIONED
7SS_STATUS_PRA
<ForwardedToNr> Description
String Phone number string in double quotes
<NoReplyConditionTime> Description
0-65532 Integer value for time
<CLI_Restriction Option> Description
0PERMANENT
1 TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_RESTRICTED
2 TEMPORARY_DEFAULT_ALLOWED
<Subscription Option> Description
1OVERRIDE_CATEGORY
2 CLI_RESTRICTION_OPTION
5RESTRICTION_PER_CALL
<SS_Status> Description
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
245
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.11 AT+CCFC Call Forwarding number and Conditions
This command allows control of the call forwarding supplementary
service. Registration, erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query
are supported. When querying the status of a network service
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should
be returned only if service is not active for any <class>.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request
Calling
forwarding
number and
conditions
AT+CCFC=<reason>
,<mode>[,<number
>[,<type>[,<class>
[,<satype>]]]]
•+CME ERROR <err>
• when <mode>=2 and
command successful:
+CCFC:
<status>,<class1>[,<number>,
<type>[,<satype>]][<CR><LF>
+CCFC:
<status>,<class2>[,<number>,
<type>[,<satype>
]][...]]
•OK
• ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CCFC=? • + CCFC: (list of supported
<reason>s)
•+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
• ERROR
<reason> Description
0Unconditional
1 Mobile busy
2No reply
3Not reachable
4All call forwarding
5 All conditional call forwarding
<mode> Description
0Disable
1 Enable
2Query status
3 Registration
4Erasure
<number> Description
string type String type phone number of forwarding address in format
specified by <type>
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
246
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<type> Description
integer format Type of address octet
129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/international
unknown. Default value if ‘+’ is not in <sca>
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number.
Default value if ‘+’ is in <sca>
161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128 - 255 Other values
<satype> Description
integer format Type of subaddress octet
128 NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), even number of address
signals
136 NSAP (X.213/ISO 8348 AD2), odd number of address
signals
160 User defined, even number of address signals
168 User defined, odd number of address signals
128 - 255 Other values reserved
<classx> Description
integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information.
Default value is 7
1Voice L1
2Data
4 Fax
8Short message service
16 Data circuit sync
32 Data circuit async
64 Dedicated packet access
128 Dedicated PAD access
<status> Description
0Not active
1Active
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
247
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.12 AT+CCWA Call Waiting
This command allows control of the call waiting supplementary service
according to 3GPP TS 22.083. Activation, deactivation and status query
are supported. When querying the status of a network service
(<mode>=2) the response line for ‘not active’ case (<status>=0) should
be returned only if service is not active for any <class>. Parameter <n>
is used to disable or enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,[<alpha>][,<CLI validity>] to the
TE when call waiting service is enabled. The command is abortable
when the network is interrogated.
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS
standards.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request call
waiting
AT+CCWA=[<n>
[,<mode>
[,<class>]]]
• when<mode>=2 and
command successful:
+CCWA:<status>,<class1>[<CR>
<LF>
+CCWA: <status>,<class2>[…]]
+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show the
current setting
AT+CCWA? • +CCWA: <n>
+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the
command is
supported
AT+CCWA=? • +CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)
+CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<n> Description
0Disable
1 Enable
<mode> Description
0Disable
1 Enable
2Query status
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
248
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result Codes:
+CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class>
<classx> Description
integer Sum of integers each representing a class of information.
Default value is 7
1Voice L1
2Data
4 Fax
8Short message service
16 Data circuit sync
32 Data circuit async
64 Dedicated packet access
128 Dedicated PAD access
<status> Description
0Not active
1Active
<number> Description
String type String type phone number of forwarding address in format
specified by <type>
<type> Description
Integer format Type of address octet in integer format (GSM 04.08
10.5.4.7)
<err> Description
0Phone failure
3 Operation not allowed
4Operation not supported
21 Invalid index
30 No network service
31 Network timeout
100 Unknown
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
249
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.13 AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty
This command allows control of the following call related services:
• a call can be temporarily disconnected from the ME but the
connection is retained by the network;
• multiparty conversation (conference calls);
• the served subscriber who has two calls (one held and the other
either active or alerting) can connect the other parties and release the
served subscriber's own connection.
Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation,
and transferred similarly as defined in 3GPP TS 22.030.
This is based on the GSM/UMTS supplementary services HOLD (Call
Hold; refer 3GPP TS 22.083 clause 2), MPTY (MultiParty; refer 3GPP
TS 22.084) and ECT (Explicit Call Transfer; refer 3GPP TS 22.091).
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other
GSM/UMTS supplementary services is described in the GSM/UMTS
standards.
Note! Call Hold and MultiParty are only applicable to teleservice 11.
It is recommended (although optional) that test command returns a list
of operations which are supported. The call number required by some
operations is denoted by “x” (e.g. +CHLD: (0,0x,1,1x,2,2x,3)).
Description Command Possible Responses
Request call related
supplementary
services
AT+CHLD=<n> • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CHLD=? • +CHLD: (list of
supported <n>s)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<n> Description
... Integer type; equals to numbers entered before SEND
button in GSM 02.30 subclause 4.5.5.1
0 Releases all held calls or sets User Determined User Busy
(UDUB) for a waiting call
0X Releases a specific call X from a held multiparty call
1 Releases all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the
other (held or waiting) call
1X Releases a specific active call X
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
250
LZT 123 7468 P1A
“X” is the numbering (starting with 1) of the call given by the sequence
of setting up or receiving the calls (active, held or waiting) as seen by
the served subscriber. Calls hold their number until they are released.
New calls take the lowest available number. Where both a held and a
waiting call exists, the above procedures shall apply to the waiting call
(i.e. not to the held call) in conflicting situation.
Note! The “directory number” case shall be handled with dial command D,
and the END case with hangup command H (or +CHUP).
16.14 AT+CLIP Call Line Identification Presentation
This command enables a called subscriber to get the identity of the
calling line when receiving a mobile terminated call. The “Set”
command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI (calling line
identity) at the TE. It has no effect on the execution of the
supplementary service CLIP in the network.
When the presentation of the CLI at the TE is enabled (if the calling
subscriber has allowed it), the unsolicited result code
+CLIP:<number>,<type>,,,<alpha> response is returned after every
RING (or +CRING:<type>) result code sent from TA to TE (refer to AT
+CRC in section ???????).Whether this will be used when a normal
voice call is answered is a manufacturer-specific option.
2 Places all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts
the other (held or waiting) call
2X Places all active calls on hold, except call X with which
communication is supported
3 Adds a held call to the conversation
4Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber
from both calls (explicit call transfer)
<n> Description
Description Command Possible Responses
Requests calling line
identification.
AT+CLIP=<n> OK
Read the current
setting
AT+CLIP? +CLIP: <n>,<m>
Show if the command
is supported
AT+CLIP=? +CLIP: (list of supported
<n>s)
<n> Description
0Disables presentation. Default value
1 Enables presentation
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
251
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Unsolicited Result codes:
+CLIP: <number>, <type>,,,<alpha>
Defined values:
16.15 AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction
This command refers to CLIR-service according to GSM 02.81 that
allows a calling subscriber to enable or disable the presentation of the
CLI to the called party when originating a call.
Set command overrides the CLIR subscription (default is restricted or
allowed) when temporary mode is provisioned as a default adjustment
for all following outgoing calls. Using the opposite command can
<m> Description
0CLIP not provisioned
1 CLIP provisioned
2Unknown (e.g. no network)
<number> Description
String Type phone number of format specified by <type> type of
address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08, sub-
clause 10.5.4.7)
<type> Description
129 129 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national/
international unknown
145 145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, international number
161 161 ISDN/telephony numbering plan, national number
128-255 Other values refer to GSM 04.08 section 10.5.4.7
Description Command Possible Responses
Request calling line
identification restriction
AT+CLIR=[<n>] • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+CLIR? • +CLIR: <n>,<m>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CLIR=? • +CLIR: (list of supported
<n>s)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
252
LZT 123 7468 P1A
revoke this adjustment. If this command is used by a subscriber without
provision of CLIR in permanent mode the network will act according
GSM 02.81.
The setting shall be per logical channel.
When the MS is turned off and then turned on again the parameter
setting <n> shall turn back to default, i.e. the presentation of CLI shall
be used according to the subscription of the CLIR service, <n> is 0.
Read command gives the default adjustment for all outgoing calls
(given in <n>), and also triggers an interrogation of the provision status
of the CLIR service (given in <m>).
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Note! On a per call base CLIR functionality is explained in subclause “ITU-T
V.25ter dial command”.
<n> Description
0Presentation indicator is used according to the
subscription of the CLIR service
1 CLIR invocation
2CLIR suppression
<m> Description
0CLIR not provisioned
1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2Unknown (e.g. no network)
3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
4CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
253
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.16 AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated
notifications. The set command enables or disables the presentation of
notification result codes from TA to TE.
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after
a mobile originated call setup, unsolicited result code +CSSI:
<code1>[,<index>] is sent to TE before any other MO call setup result
codes presented in this ETS or in V.25ter. When several different
<code1>s are received from the network, each of them shall have its
own +CSSI result code.
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received
during a mobile terminated call setup or during a call, or when a forward
check supplementary service notification is received, unsolicited result
code +CSSU: <code2>[,<index>] is sent to TE. In case of MT call
setup, result code is sent after every +CLIP result code (refer command
“Calling line identification presentation +CLIP”) and when several
different <code2>s are received from the network, each of them shall
have its own +CSSU result code.
Note! The difference between <index> and <cindex> is that <index> is a
position mark while <cindex> is a unique value for each CUG. <index>
is not supported.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Description Command Possible Responses
Presentation of
notification result
codes from TA to TE
AT+CSSN=[<n>[,<m>]] • +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Read the current
setting
AT+CSSN? • +CSSN: <n>,<m>
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
Test if the command is
supported
AT+CSSN=? • +CSSN: (list of
supported <n>s),(list
of supported <m>s)
• +CME ERROR <err>
•OK
•ERROR
<n> Description
0Disable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA
1 Enable the +CSSI result code presentation status in the TA
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
254
LZT 123 7468 P1A
<m> Description
0Disable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA
1 Enable the +CSSU result code presentation status in the TA
<code1> Description
0 Unconditional call forwarding is active
1 Some of the conditional call forwarding are active
2Call has been forwarded
3 Call is waiting
4This is a CUG call (also <index> present)
5 Outgoing calls are barred
6Incoming calls are barred
7 CLIR suppression rejected
<index> Description
0…9 CUG index
10 No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
<code2> Description
0This is a forwarded call (MT call setup)
1 This is a CUG call (also <index> present) (MT call setup)
2Call has been put on hold (during a voice call)
3 Call has been retrieved (during a voice call)
4 Multiparty call entered (during a voice call)
5 Call on hold has been released (this is not a SS
notification) (during a voice call)
6Forward check SS message received (can be received
whenever)
10 Incoming call has been forwarded
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
255
LZT 123 7468 P1A
16.17 AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
This command allows control of the Unstructured Supplementary
Service Data (USSD) according to GSM 02.90. Both network and
mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to
disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD
response from the network, or network initiated operation) +CUSD:
<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE. In addition, value <n>=2 is used to cancel
an ongoing USSD session. If <n> is not given then the default value 0
is taken.
When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response
USSD string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The
response USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent
unsolicited +CUSD: result code.
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other
GSM supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.
Test command returns values supported by the TA as a compound
value.
Some different scenarios are shown below:
• An incoming network initiated USSD-Notify should be presented to
the external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the
external application has enabled result code presentation.
• An incoming USSD-request asking for a reply should sent to the
external application as an unsolicited result code +CUSD: if the
external application has enabled result code.
• If the external application answers to the request with the command
AT+CUSD then the ME sends the answer to the network.
• A USSD-request sent with the command AT+CUSD from the
external application.
Description Command Possible Responses
Request unstructured
supplementary service
data
AT+CUSD=[<n>[,<str>]] • +CME ERROR: <err>
•OK
Show supported
message types along
with the current service
setting
AT+CUSD? • +CUSD: <n>
•OK
•ERROR
Show list of supported
services
AT+CUSD=? • +CUSD: (list of
supported <n>s)
•OK
•ERROR
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
256
LZT 123 7468 P1A
The different alternatives are shown below.
Example 1
Network Mobile Equipment External application
1Signal Sends unsolicited
result code +CUSD
Result code presentation
enabled, presented
2 Signal asking
for reply
Sends unsolicited
result code +CUSD
Result code presentation
enabled, presented
3Answer AT+CUSD
3b Sends AT+CUSD
<n> Description
0Disable result code presentation in the TA
1 Enable result code presentation in the TA
2 Terminate (abort) USSD dialogue. This value is not applicable to
the read command response
<str> Description
string String type USSD (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not
interrogated):
-If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used:
*if TE character set other than “HEX” (refer command Select TE
Character Set +CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into
current TE character set according to rules of
GSM 07.05 Annex A
AT Command Result Code Description
AT+CUSD=1,“*34#” Enable the Result Code
presentation in the TAE
and send a USSD-
request
+CUSD:1,“id code” OK Further user action
required, give id code
AT+CUSD=1,“7465338” Id code given
+CUSD:0 OK No further user action
required
16. SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICES
257
LZT 123 7468 P1A
Example 2
Example 3
AT Command Result Code Description
+CUSD:0,“Expensive
incoming call”
Incoming USSD-notify telling
the user that the incoming call
is expensive
AT Command Result Code Description
AT+CUSD=1,“*55*0700#” Enable the Result Code
presentation in the TAE
and send a USSD-request
asking for an alarm at the
time 07:00
+CUSD:0,“ALARM” At 07:00 the network
sends an alarm to the user
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
258
LZT 123 7468 P1A
259
LZT 123 7468 P1A
17. Alphabetical Listing of AT Commands
AT Command Description Page No.
AT Attention Command 129
AT&C Circuit 109 (DCD) Control 133
AT&D Circuit 108 (DTR) Response 133
AT&F Set to Factory Defined Configuration 129
AT&S Circuit 107 (DSR) Response 134
AT&W Store User Profile 129
AT* List all Supported AT Commands 130
AT*E2APR M2M Audio Profile Manipulation 95
AT*E2CD Ericsson M2M Cell Description 143
AT*E2EAMS Ericsson M2M Audio Profile Modification 89
AT*E2EMM Ericsson M2M Engineering Monitoring Mode 145
AT*E2ESC M2M Escape Sequence Guard Time 142
AT*E2FAX Ericsson M2M Fax Comm. Baud Rate Modification 127
AT*E2NBTS Ericsson M2M Neighbour BTS 165
AT*E2PBCS Ericsson M2M Phonebook Check Sum 167
AT*E2SPN M2M Service Provider Indication 151
AT*E2SSD M2M Supplementary Service Dispatch 239
AT*E2SSI M2M Supplementary Service Indications 240
AT*E2SSN Ericsson M2M SIM Serial Number 154
AT*E2STKC M2M STK Set Up Call 226
AT*E2STKD M2M STK Display Text 216
AT*E2STKG M2M STK Get Inkey 217
AT*E2STKI M2M STK Get Input 219
AT*E2STKL M2M STK Select Item 222
AT*E2STKM M2M STK Set Up Menu 224
AT*E2STKN M2M STK Envelope (Menu Selection) 226
AT*E2STKO SIM Application Toolkit Settings 231
AT*E2STKS SIM Application Toolkit Settings 215
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
260
LZT 123 7468 P1A
AT*EALR Ericsson Audio Line Request 97
AT*EALS Ericsson Request ALS Status 151
AT*EAMS Ericsson Audio Mode Selection 98
AT*EARS Ericsson Audio Ring Signal 99
AT*ECAM Ericsson Call Monitoring 72
AT*ECPI Ciphering Indicator 163
AT*ECSP Ericsson Customer Service Profile 152
AT*EDIF Ericsson Divert Function 237
AT*EDST Ericsson Daylight Saving Time 73
AT*EGIR Ericsson Group Item Read 132
AT*EIPS Identity Presentation Set 238
AT*ELAM Ericsson Local Audio Mode 100
AT*ELIN Ericsson Line Set 239
AT*EMAR Ericsson Master Reset 74
AT*EMIC Ericsson Microphone Mode 100
AT*EMIR Ericsson Music Mute Indication Request 101
AT*EPEE Ericsson Pin Event 74
AT*EPNR Ericsson Read SIM Preferred Network 153
AT*EPNW Ericsson Write SIM Preferred Network 154
AT*ESAG Ericsson Add to Group 167
AT*ESCG Ericsson Create Group 168
AT*ESCN Ericsson Set Credit Card Number 169
AT*ESDG Ericsson Delete Group 171
AT*ESDI Ericsson Delete Group Item 171
AT*ESGR Ericsson Group Read 172
AT*ESLN Ericsson Set Line Name 155
AT*ESNU Ericsson Settings Number 173
AT*EXVC Ericsson SET External Volume Control 101
AT+CACM Accumulated Call Meter 233
AT+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum 234
AT+CAOC Advice of Charge 235
AT+CBST Select Bearer Service Type 103
AT+CCFC Call Forwarding Number and Conditions 245
AT Command Description Page No.
17. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS
261
LZT 123 7468 P1A
AT+CCLK Set Clock and Date 75
AT+CCWA Call Waiting 247
AT+CEER Extended Error Report 75
AT+CFUN Set Phone Functionality 76
AT+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate 107
AT+CGATT GPRS Attach or Detach 108
AT+CGDATA Enter Data State 109
AT+CGDCONT Define PDP Context 110
AT+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting 112
AT+CGMI Read MS Manufacturer Identification 130
AT+CGMM Read MS Model Identification 130
AT+CGMR Read MS Revision Identification 131
AT+CGPADDR Show PDP Address 113
AT+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile (Minimum Acceptable) 114
AT+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile (Requested) 116
AT+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status 119
AT+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages 120
AT+CGSN Read MS Product Serial Number Identification 131
AT+CHLD Call Hold and Multiparty 249
AT+CHSC HSCSD Current Call Parameters 121
AT+CHSD HSCSD Device Parameters 122
AT+CHSN HSCSD Non Transparent Call Configuration 123
AT+CHSR HSCSD Parameters Report 124
AT+CHSU HSCSD Automatic User Initiated Upgrading 125
AT+CHUP Hang Up Call 63
AT+CIMI Subscriber Identification 156
AT+CIND Indicator Control 77
AT+CLAC List All Available AT Commands 78
AT+CLCK Facility Lock 156
AT+CLIP Calling Line Identification 250
AT+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction 251
AT+CMEE Mobile Equipment Error 78
AT+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting 79
AT Command Description Page No.
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
262
LZT 123 7468 P1A
AT+CMGC Send Command 189
AT+CMGD Delete Message 207
AT+CMGF Message Format 182
AT+CMGL List Message 201
AT+CMGR Read Message 196
AT+CMGS Send Message 185
AT+CMGW Write Message to Memory 182
AT+CMOD Call Mode 64
AT+CMSS Send From Storage 188
AT+CMUX Switch to 07.10 Multiplex Protocol 137
AT+CNMI New Message Indications to TE 192
AT+CNUM Subscriber Number 158
AT+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation 159
AT+COPS Operator Selection 161
AT+CPAS Phone Activity Status 80
AT+CPBF Phonebook Find 174
AT+CPBR Phonebook Read 174
AT+CPBS Phone Storage 176
AT+CPBW Phonebook Write 177
AT+CPIN PIN Control 81
AT+CPMS Preferred Message Storage 179
AT+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table 236
AT+CPWD Change Password 83
AT+CR Service Reporting Control 85
AT+CRC Cellular Result Code 85
AT+CREG Network Registration 162
AT+CRES Restore SMS Settings 139
AT+CRLP Radio Link Protocol 105
AT+CSAS Save Settings 86
AT+CSCA Service Centre Address 181
AT+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Type 213
AT+CSCS Select Character Set 209
AT+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters 207
AT Command Description Page No.
17. ALPHABETICAL LISTING OF AT COMMANDS
263
LZT 123 7468 P1A
AT+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters 208
AT+CSMS Select Message Service 210
AT+CSQ Signal Strength 87
AT+CSSN Supplementary Service Notification 253
AT+CTZU Automatic Time Zone Update 88
AT+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data 255
AT+CVHU Voice Hang-Up 65
"AT+F____" Low Level Fax Commands 128
AT+GCAP Request Modem Capabilities List 172
AT+ICF Cable Interface Character Format 139
AT+IFC DTE-DCE Local Flow Control 140
AT+ILRR Cable Interface Local Rate Reporting 141
AT+IPR Cable Interface Port Command 141
AT+VTS DTMF and Tone Generation 65
AT+WS46 Mode Selection 134
ATA Answer 59
ATD Dial 60
ATE Command Echo 135
ATH Hang up 62
ATI Identification Information 131
ATO Return to Online Data Mode 62
ATP Select Pulse Dialling 62
ATQ Result Code Suppression 67
ATS0 Automatic Answer Control 67
ATS10 Automatic Disconnect Delay Control 72
ATS2 Escape Sequence Character 68
ATS3 Command Line Termination Character 68
ATS4 Response Formatting Character 69
ATS5 Command Line Editing Character (BACKSPACE) 70
ATS6 Blind Dial Delay Control 70
ATS7 Connection Completion Timeout 70
ATS8 Comma Dial Modifier Delay Control 70
AT Command Description Page No.
GM28 INTEGRATOR’S MANUAL
264
LZT 123 7468 P1A
ATT Select Tone Dialling 62
ATV DCE Response Format 135
ATX Call Progress Monitoring Control 63
ATZ Reset to Default Configuration 136
AT Command Description Page No.
Unsolicited
Result Code
Description Page No.
*E2STKE STK Send Short Message 228
*E2STKP STK Send SS 229
*E2STKR STK Refresh 231
*E2STKU STK Send USSD 230